Yamaha Htr 5990 Owners Manual

HTR-5990 to the manual 02f85b52-469e-4196-9909-ca9bc1026dbd

: Yamaha Htr-5990-Owners-Manual yamaha-htr-5990-owners-manual-132230 yamaha pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 128 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

©

2005 All rights reserved.

HTR-5990

Printed in Malaysia WF99950

HTR-5990

AV Receiver

OWNER’S MANUAL

U

PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108

POLK AUDIO 0108

PROFITRONIC 0267

PROLINE 0027

PROSCAN 0087, 1087

PROTEC 0099

PULSAR 0066

PYE 0108

QUASAR 0062, 1062

QUELLE 0108

RCA 0062, 0069, 0087,

0267, 0834, 1062,

1087

RADIOSHACK 0027

RADIOLA 0108

RADIX 0064

RANDEX 0064

REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064,

0074, 0075, 0131

REOC 0375

REPLAYTV 0641, 0643

REX 0068

ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267,

0305

RUNCO 0066

SBR 0108

SEG 0267

SEI 0108

STS 0069

SABA 0068, 0347

SALORA 0070

SAMPO 0064, 0075

SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459

SANKY 0066, 0075

SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094,

1506

SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267

SAVILLE 0379

SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,

0131

SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108

SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211

SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064,

0069, 0074, 0131,

1264

SELECO 0068

SEMP 0072

SHARP 0075, 0834

SHINTOM 0099, 0131

SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131

SILVA 0064

SINGER 0072, 0099

SINUDYNE 0108

SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643

SONTEC 0064

SONY 0027, 0059, 0060,

0062, 0663, 1259

SUNKAI 0375

SUNSTAR 0027

SUNTRONIC 0027

SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108,

0070, 1808

SYMPHONIC 0027

TMK 0267

TANDY 0027, 0131

TASHIKO 0027, 0064

TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072,

0094, 0108

TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305,

0334, 0669

TECHNICS 0062, 0253

TECO 0062, 0064, 0068,

0075

TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064

TELEAVIA 0068

TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347

TENOSAL 0099

TENSAI 0027

THOMAS 0027

THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094,

0347

THORN 0068, 0131

TIVO 0645, 0663

TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072,

0094, 0108, 0872

TOTEVISION 0064, 0267

UHER 0267

UNITECH 0267

UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,

0267

VECTOR 0072

VICTOR 0068, 0094

VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072

VIDEOMAGIC 0064

VIDEOSONIC 0267

VILLAIN 0027

WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069,

0074, 0075, 0087,

0099, 0108, 0267

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0099

XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099

YAMAHA 0068

YAMISHI 0099

YOKAN 0099

YOKO 0267

ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066,

1506

HTR-5990_U-cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, August 2, 2005 11:14 AM

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

i

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle

is intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the product is operated.

2Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions

should be followed.

5Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before

cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.

6Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by

the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –

for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or

laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;

and the like.

8Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,

stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,

causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious

damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold

with the product. Any mounting of the product should

follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a

mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.

9A product and cart combination should be moved with care.

Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may

cause the product and cart combination to

overturn.

10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided

for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the

product and to protect it from overheating, and these

openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings

should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,

sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not

be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack

unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s

instructions have been adhered to.

11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from

the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If

you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,

consult your product dealer or local power company. For

products intended to operate from battery power, or other

sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped

with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having

one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the

power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you

are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try

reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact

your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not

defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched

by items placed upon or against them, paying particular

attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the

point where they exit from the product.

14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a

lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for

long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and

disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent

damage to the product due to lightning and power-line

surges.

15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be

located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other

electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such

power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna

system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching

such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be

fatal.

16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension

cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result

in a risk of fire or electric shock.

17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind

into this product through openings as they may touch

dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result

in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on

the product.

18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself

as opening or removing covers may expose you to

dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the

wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:

a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the

product,

c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

ii

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

d) If the product does not operate normally by following

the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls

that are covered by the operating instructions as an

improper adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive work by a

qualified technician to restore the product to its normal

operation,

e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any

way, and

f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in

performance - this indicates a need for service.

20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,

be sure the service technician has used replacement parts

specified by the manufacturer or have the same

characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized

substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other

hazards.

21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to

this product, ask the service technician to perform safety

checks to determine that the product is in proper operating

condition.

22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted

to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the

manufacturer.

23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat

sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or

cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna

or cable system is grounded so as to provide some

protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.

Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,

provides information with regard to proper grounding of the

mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire

to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,

location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding

electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system

installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that

provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in

particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be

connected to the grounding system of the building, as

close to the point of cable entry as practical.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST

be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to

follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to

use this product in the USA.

3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply

with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15

for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these

requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that

your use of this product in a residential environment will

not result in harmful interference with other electronic

devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if

not installed and used according to the instructions found

in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the

operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this

product is found to be the source of interference, which

can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,

please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the

following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,

change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

iii

1To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,

dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least

30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on

the back of this unit.

3Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,

or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with

high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto

this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to

this unit.

6Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,

etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature

inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections

are complete.

8Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,

possibly causing damage.

9Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this

unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may

cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage

resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than

specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and

outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit

during a lightning storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The

cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time

(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall

outlet.

16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power

plug can be reached easily.

17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on

common operating errors before concluding that this unit is

faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press MASTER ON/OFF to release it

outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, the main

room, Zone 2 and Zone 3 and then disconnect the AC power

plug from the AC wall outlet.

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your

equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or

distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is

often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group

recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,

it is not disconnected from the AC power source even

if you turn off this unit by MASTER ON/OFF. In this

state, this unit is designed to consume a very small

quantity of power.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS

Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la

plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de

la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à

la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

1

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

FEATURES............................................................. 2

GETTING STARTED............................................ 3

Supplied accessories .................................................. 3

Preparing the remote control ..................................... 4

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 5

Front panel ................................................................. 5

Remote control........................................................... 7

Front panel display .................................................... 9

Rear panel ................................................................ 11

CONNECTIONS .................................................. 12

Before connecting speakers ..................................... 12

Connecting speakers ................................................ 13

Using bi-wire and bi-AMP connections .................. 17

Information on cables and jacks

used for connections ............................................ 18

Connecting HDMI components ............................... 21

Connecting video components................................. 22

Connecting audio components................................. 25

Connecting the antennas .......................................... 27

Connecting the power cable..................................... 28

Turning on and off this unit ..................................... 28

Setting the speaker impedance................................. 29

AUTO SETUP....................................................... 30

Introduction.............................................................. 30

Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 30

Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 31

PLAYBACK.......................................................... 34

Basic operations....................................................... 34

Additional operations............................................... 36

RECORDING ....................................................... 43

FM/AM TUNING ................................................. 44

Automatic tuning ..................................................... 44

Manual tuning .......................................................... 45

Automatic preset tuning........................................... 45

Manual preset tuning ............................................... 47

Selecting preset stations........................................... 48

Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 49

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING .................. 50

What is XM Satellite Radio? ................................... 50

XM Satellite Radio connections .............................. 50

XM Satellite Radio controls and functions.............. 51

Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 52

Selecting the XM Satellite Radio mode................... 53

Using XM Satellite Radio search modes ................. 53

Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels ............ 56

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...... 58

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......59

What is a sound field? ............................................. 59

Changing parameter settings ................................... 59

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

DESCRIPTIONS ...............................................61

For movie/video sources.......................................... 61

For music sources .................................................... 63

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER

DESCRIPTIONS ...............................................64

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

SPEAKER LAYOUTS......................................69

MANUAL SETUP .................................................73

Using MANUAL SETUP........................................ 75

Using BASIC MENU .............................................. 76

Using SOUND MENU ............................................ 79

Using INPUT MENU .............................................. 81

Using OPTION MENU ........................................... 83

ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................87

Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 87

Adjusting speaker levels .......................................... 87

ADVANCED SETUP ............................................88

Using ADVANCED SETUP ................................... 88

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................90

Control area ............................................................. 90

Controlling each component.................................... 91

Setting remote control codes ................................... 92

Using LEARN ......................................................... 94

Using RE-NAME .................................................... 96

Using MACRO ........................................................ 97

Using CLEAR.......................................................... 99

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 .................................................102

Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components ... 102

Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3.................................... 103

Controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3.............................. 104

Using the control mode of Zone 2 and Zone 3 ...... 105

HDMI ...................................................................106

What is HDMI? ..................................................... 106

Setting the HDMI parameters................................ 107

Basic HDMI operations ......................................... 107

TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................108

GLOSSARY .........................................................115

Audio information ................................................. 115

Video information.................................................. 117

Sound field program information .......................... 117

Parametric equalizer information .......................... 118

SPECIFICATIONS.............................................119

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

FEATURES

2

Built-in 7-channel power amplifier

◆Minimum RMS Output Power

(0.04% THD, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω)

Front: 120 W + 120 W

Center: 120 W

Surround: 120 W + 120 W

Surround Back: 120 W + 120 W

Sound field features

◆Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of

sound fields

◆THX Select2

◆Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

◆DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1,

DTS Neo:6 decoder, DTS 96/24

◆Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic x decoder

◆Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆SILENT CINEMA™

Sophisticated AM/FM tuner

◆40-station random access preset tuning

◆Automatic preset tuning

◆Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)

XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only)

◆XM Satellite Radio tuning capability

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

◆HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or

high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital

audio

◆Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion

(composite video ↔ S-video ↔ component video →

HDMI digital video) capability for monitor out

Other features

◆YPAO (YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic

Optimizer) for automatic speaker setup

◆192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

◆OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to

optimize this unit to suit your individual audio/video

system

◆6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete

multi-channel input

◆Short message function

◆PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog and

PCM sources

◆S-video input/output capability

◆Component video input/output capability

◆Analog video I/P conversion from 480i to 480p

◆Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks

◆Sleep timer

◆Cinema and music night listening mode

◆Remote control with preset remote control codes and

learning/macro capability

◆Zone 2/Zone 3 custom installation facility

•y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button

names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc.

In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of

Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia

Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA

CORPORATION.

The THX logo is a trademark of THX Ltd. which may be

registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.

© 2005 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. All other

trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

FEATURES

GETTING STARTED

3

INTRODUCTION

Please check that you received all of the following parts.

GETTING STARTED

Supplied accessories

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

MENU

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

BAND

SRCH MODE

NIGHT

AUDI O

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

1

2B

THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOLUME

+

–

3421

90

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

A

CH

+

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

+

–

AMP

SOURCE

TV

MACROONOFF

A

SPEAKERSMEMORY

XM

SET MENU

ON-SCREEN

XM MEMORY

STRAIGHT

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT.

Remote control

Batteries (x4)

(AAA, R03) AM loop antenna

Optimizer microphone

Speaker terminal

wrench

Power cable

Indoor FM antenna

GETTING STARTED

4

■Installing batteries

1Press the part and slide the battery

compartment cover off.

2Insert four supplied batteries

(AAA, R03) according to the polarity

markings on the inside of the battery

compartment.

3Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.

• Change all of the batteries if you notice conditions such as the

operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator

does not flash, or its light or display window become dim.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as

these different types of batteries may have the same shape and

color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid

touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before

installing new batteries.

• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose

of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.

■Using the remote control

The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on the main unit during operation.

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types

of conditions:

– places of high humidity, such as near a bath

– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove

– extremely low temperatures

– dusty places

Preparing the remote control

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries, set up the remote control code and program

any acquired functions that may have been cleared.

Notes

1

3

2

Notes

VOLUME

EDIT

SEARCH MODE CATEGORY

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

FM/AM

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

hA/B/C/D/E

AUDIO SELECT

TONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT ZONE CONTROL

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

OPTIMIZER MIC

ON/OFF ON/OFF

ON :OFF

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

BA

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT

PROGRAM

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

30 30

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

MENU

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

BAND

SRCH MODE

NIGHT

AUDIO

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

1

2B

THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOLUME

+

–

3421

90

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

A

CH

+

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

+

–

AMP

SOURCE

TV

MACROONOFF

A

SPEAKERSMEMORY

XM

SET MENU

PRESET/CH

ON SCREEN

XM MEMORY

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

A-E/CAT.

Approximately 6 m (20 ft)

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

5

INTRODUCTION

The XM Satellite Radio controls (SEARCH MODE, CATEGORY, PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h, MEMORY and DISPLAY) are only

applicable to the U.S.A. model and are operational only when XM is selected as the input source. For details, see “Front panel

functions” on page 51.

1MASTER ON/OFF

Press inward to the ON position.

• Turns on this unit.

• Turns on the main room.

• Sets Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby mode.

Press again to release it outward to the OFF position.

• Turns off this unit.

• Turns off the main room, Zone 2 and Zone 3.

See page 28 for details.

2MAIN ZONE ON/OFF

Turns on this unit only or sets it to the standby mode.

y

In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small quantity of

power.

• When you turn on this unit, there will be a 6 to 7 second delay

before this unit can reproduce sound.

• This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is

pressed inward to the ON position.

3ZONE 2 ON/OFF

Turns on Zone 2 only or sets it to the standby mode.

See page 28 for details.

This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is

pressed inward to the ON position.

4ZONE 3 ON/OFF

Turns on Zone 3 only or sets it to the standby mode.

See page 28 for details.

This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is

pressed inward to the ON position.

5Remote control sensor

Receives infrared signals from the remote control.

6PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)

Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h

between selecting preset station numbers and tuning when

TUNER is selected as the input source (see pages 44 to

49).

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front panel

Note

VOLUME

EDIT

SEARCH MODE CATEGORY

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

FM/AM

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

hA/B/C/D/E

AUDIO SELECT

TONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT ZONE CONTROL

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

OPTIMIZER MIC

ON/OFF ON/OFF

ON :OFF

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

BA

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT

PROGRAM

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

ENKJG LI MHOFD

1 2 3 456 BA7 809C

(U.S.A. model)

Notes

Note

Note

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

6

7FM/AM

Switches the reception band (FM or AM) when TUNER is

selected as the input source (see page 44).

The frequency of the previously received station is automatically

recalled.

8A/B/C/D/E

Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when

TUNER is selected as the input source (see page 48).

9PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h

Selects the preset station number (1 to 8) when TUNER is

selected as the input source and the colon (:) is displayed

next to the band indication in the front panel display.

Selects the tuning frequency when TUNER is selected as

the input source and the colon (:) is not displayed in the

front panel display.

See pages 44 to 49 for details.

0Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this

unit.

AMEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Stores a station in the memory when TUNER is selected

as the input source. Hold down for more than 3 seconds to

start automatic preset tuning (see page 45).

BTUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L), DISPLAY

Switches the tuning mode between automatic (the AUTO

indicator is turned on) and manual (the AUTO indicator is

turned off) when TUNER is selected as the input source.

CVOLUME

Controls the volume level of all audio channels.

This does not affect the OUT (REC) level.

DOPTIMIZER MIC jack

Use to connect the supplied optimizer microphone to run

AUTO SETUP (see page 30).

EPHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack

Outputs audio signals for private listening with

headphones.

• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the

PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers.

• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to 2-

channel stereo (front left and right channels).

FSPEAKERS A/B

Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the

SPEAKERS A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each

time the corresponding button is pressed.

GPURE DIRECT

Turns on or off the PURE DIRECT mode (see page 39).

The indicator around the button lights up when the unit is in the

PURE DIRECT mode.

HSTRAIGHT (EFFECT)

Turns the sound field programs on or off. When

STRAIGHT is selected, 2-channel or multi-channel input

signals are output directly from the respective speakers

without effect processing.

IPROGRAM selector

Use to select sound field programs or adjust the balance of

bass and treble in conjunction with TONE CONTROL.

JTONE CONTROL

Use to adjust the balance of bass and treble for the front

left and right and center channels (see page 36).

KAUDIO SELECT

Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack

between AUTO, HDMI, COAX/OPT and ANALOG when

one component is connected to two or more input jacks on

the rear panel (see page 41).

LINPUT selector

Selects the desired input source.

MMULTI CH INPUT

Selects the input source connected to the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT

source takes priority over the input source selected with

the INPUT selector (or the input selector buttons on the

remote control).

NZONE CONTROL

Switches the zone you want to control between the main

unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see page 104).

After you press ZONE CONTROL, the indicator for the

currently selected zone flashes in the front panel display

for approximately 5 seconds. While the indicator is

flashing, perform the desired operation.

OVIDEO AUX jacks

Input audio and video signals from an external source such

as a game console. To reproduce source signals at these

jacks, select V-AUX as the input source.

Note

Note

Notes

Note

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

7

INTRODUCTION

This section describes the function of each control on the

remote control used to control this unit. Set AMP/

SOURCE/TV to AMP to operate this unit. To operate

other components, see “REMOTE CONTROL

FEATURES” on page 90.

The XM Satellite Radio controls (XM, XM MEMORY, SRCH

MODE, DISPLAY, cursor buttons k / n / l / h, numeric

buttons and ENT.) are only applicable to the U.S.A. model and

are operational only when XM is selected as the input source. For

details, see “Remote control functions” on page 51.

1Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

2Transmission indicator

Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared

signals.

3Input selector buttons

Select the input source and change the control area.

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press

TUNER to select TUNER as the input source.

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press XM

to select XM as the input source.

4Display window

Shows the name of the selected input source that you can

control.

5LEVEL, BAND

Selects the speaker you want to adjust the speaker output

level for when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP

(see page 87).

Switches the reception band between FM and AM when

AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and TUNER is

selected as the input source.

6Cursor buttons k / n / l / h, ENTER

Selects and adjusts the DSP program parameters or OSD

menu items when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP.

Press l / h to select a preset station group (A to E) and

k / n to select a preset station number (1 to 8) when

AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and TUNER is

selected as the input source.

7RETURN

Returns to the upper or the previous directory in the OSD

menu.

8Sound field program / numeric buttons

Select sound field programs when AMP/SOURCE/TV is

set to AMP.

Use SELECT to play back 2-channel sources in the multi-

channel format (see page 38).

Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1

channel playback of multi-channel software (see page 37).

Use numbers 1 to 8 to select preset stations when AMP/

SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and TUNER is selected

as the input source.

9MACRO ON/OFF

Turns on or off the macro function (see page 98).

0MACRO

Programs a series of operations to be controlled with a

single button (see page 97).

Remote control

Note

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

MENU

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

BAND

SRCH MODE

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

1

2B

THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOLUME

+

–

3421

90

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

A

CH

+

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

+

–

AMP

SOURCE

TV

MACROONOFF

A

SPEAKERSMEMORY

XM

PRESET/CH SET MENU

ON SCREEN

FREQ/TEXT EON STARTMODE PTY SEEK

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

(U.S.A. model)

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

8

ASTANDBY

Sets this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby mode (see

page 28).

This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the

front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.

BPOWER

Turns on this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see page 28).

This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the

front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.

CAUDIO SEL

Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack

between AUTO, HDMI, COAX/OPT and ANALOG when

one component is connected to two or more input jacks on

the rear panel (see page 41).

DSLEEP

Sets the sleep timer.

EMULTI CH IN

Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external

decoder, etc.

FSELECT k / n

Selects another input source that you can control

independently of the input source selected with the input

selector buttons.

GVOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level.

HAMP/SOURCE/TV

Selects the component you want to control with the

remote control.

AMP

Set to this position to operate this unit.

SOURCE

Set to this position to operate the component selected with

an input selector button.

TV

Set to this position to operate the television assigned to

either DTV or PHONO.

If televisions are assigned to both DTV and PHONO, the one

assigned to DTV takes priority and gets operated when AMP/

SOURCE/TV is set to TV.

y

To set the remote control codes for other components, see

page 92.

IMUTE

Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to

the previous volume level.

JPURE DIRECT

Turns on or off the PURE DIRECT mode (see page 39).

KSET MENU

Enters or exits the SET MENU mode.

LNIGHT

Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 39).

MON SCREEN

Selects the display mode of the on-screen display (OSD)

that appears on your monitor (see page 87).

NSTRAIGHT (EFFECT)

Switches the sound field programs off or on. When

STRAIGHT is selected, 2-channel or multi-channel input

signals are output directly from their respective speakers

without effect processing.

OSPEAKERS A/B

Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the

SPEAKERS A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each

time the corresponding button is pressed.

PRE-NAME

Changes the name of the input source in the display

window (see page 96).

QCLEAR

Clears remote control codes or functions acquired from

the learn, macro and rename features (see page 99).

RLEARN

Programs remote control codes or functions from other

remote controls (see page 94).

Note

Note

Note

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

9

INTRODUCTION

The XM indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. model.

1YPAO indicator

Lights up when the AUTO SETUP procedure is in

progress and when the AUTO SETUP speaker settings are

used without any modifications.

2HDMI indicator

Lights up when HDMI components are assigned to HDMI

IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks and they are recognized by this

unit (see page 81).

Turns off when no HDMI component is assigned to the

either HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack or when no HDMI

component is recognized by this unit although they are

assigned to the HDMI IN jacks (see page 81).

See page 106 for details.

3CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field

program.

4Decoder indicators

When any of the decoders of this unit operate, the

respective indicator lights up.

5Input source indicators

Light up when the corresponding input source is selected.

6VOLUME level indicator

Indicates the volume level.

7MUTE indicator

Flashes while the MUTE function is on.

8AUTO indicator

Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.

9STEREO indicator

Lights up when this unit is receiving a stereo signal for an

FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit.

0TUNED indicator

Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station.

AMEMORY indicator

Flashes to indicate that a station can be stored.

BHeadphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected.

CSILENT CINEMA indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound

field program is selected (see page 36).

DSP A B indicators

Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.

Both indicators light up when both sets of front speakers

are selected or when bi-wiring.

EVIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active

(see page 41).

FSound field indicators

Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields.

GHiFi DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field

program.

HPCM indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code

modulation) digital audio signals.

IDSD indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing DSD (direct

stream digital) digital audio signals.

JMulti-information display

Shows the name of the current sound field program and

other information when adjusting or changing settings.

Front panel display

Note

96

24

MATRIX

DISCRETE

VIRTUAL

CINEMA

SILENT

SLEEP

NIGHT

ZONE3

ZONE2

STEREO

AUTO TUNED

MEMORY

HiFi DSP

YPAO

V-AUX

A B

SP

MUTE

VOLUME

LFE

96/24

LL C R

SL SB SR

dB

DIGITAL

PCM

DSD

EX

PL x CS

CS

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

123 4 5 6 7 890A

PONMLKJHGFEDCB I

Presence DSP sound field

Listening position

Left surround

DSP sound field

Right surround

DSP sound field

Surround/surround back DSP sound field

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

10

K96/24 indicator

Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.

LLFE indicator

Lights up when the input signal contains an LFE signal.

MInput channel and speaker indicators

Input channel indicators

Indicate the channel components of the current digital

input signal.

Presence and surround back speaker

indicators

Light up according to the number of presence and

surround back speakers set for PRESENCE SP

(see page 77) and SB L/R SP (see page 77) in

MANUAL SETUP when TEST TONE in MANUAL

SETUP is set to ON (see page 79).

y

You can make settings for the presence and surround back

speakers automatically by running AUTO SETUP

(see page 30) or manually by adjusting settings for

PRESENCE SP (see page 77) and SB L/R SP (see page 77)

in MANUAL SETUP.

NNIGHT indicator

Lights up when you select a night listening mode.

OSLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on.

PZONE 2/ZONE 3 indicators

Light up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned on.

LL C R

SL SB SR

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

11

INTRODUCTION

1DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks

See pages 22, 23 and 25 for connection information.

2DIGITAL INPUT jacks

See pages 22, 23 and 25 for details.

3Video component jacks

See pages 22 and 23 for connection information.

4Audio component jacks

See pages 22, 23 and 25 for connection information.

5CONTROL OUT jacks

These are control expansion terminals for factory use only.

6WRENCH HOLDER

Use to hook the supplied speaker terminal wrench when

not in use (see page 14).

7Antenna terminals

See page 27 for connection information.

8AC OUTLETS

Use to supply power to your other A/V components

(see page 28).

9AC IN

Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cable

(see page 28).

0XM jack (U.S.A. model only)

See page 50 for connection information.

AHDMI IN/OUT connectors

See page 106 for connection information.

BRS-232C terminal

This is a control expansion terminal for factory use only.

Consult you dealer for details.

CZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks

See page 102 for details.

DMULTI CH INPUT jacks

See page 24 for connection information.

EPRE OUT jacks

See page 26 for connection information.

FREMOTE IN/OUT jacks

See page 102 for details.

GSpeaker terminals

See page 13 for connection information.

HPRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker terminals

See page 15 for connection information.

Rear panel

SPEAKERS

FRONT

SURROUND

FRONT CENTER

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE

SURROUND/ZONE 2(3)

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

SURROUND BACK

SINGLE

CENTER

SINGLE

(SB)

RL

R

R

R

L

L

L

RL

RL

RL

RL

RL

MONITOR OUT

AUDIOVIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

DTV

CBL/

SAT

VIDEO

IN

OUT

OUT

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

ZONE

2

IN

CENTERSUBWOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT

OUTPUT

AUDIO

(PLAY)

IN

(PLAY)

IN

OUT

(REC)

OUT

(REC)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

CD

PHONO

SURROUND

TUNER

IN 1

IN 2

OUT

FM ANT

75Ω

UNBAL.

AM ANT

GND

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

CD

CD DVD

COAXIAL

+

–

+

–

+

–

+

+

––

–

+

+

+

+

+

–

–

–

–

A

B

RS-232C

HDMIXM

DVR/

VCR 2

CONTROL OUT

REMOTE

GND

WRENCH

HOLDER

IN

OUT

21

COMPONENT VIDEO

PR

MONITOR OUT

PBY

DVD

DTV

CBL/

SAT

+12V 15mA MAX.

PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3)

ZONE

3

FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)

AC OUTLETS

AC IN

100W MAX.TOTAL

SWITCHED

12 3 4 56 7 8 9

HGFEDCBA0

(U.S.A. model)

CONNECTIONS

12

The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R*

speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP,

multi-channel audio sources and THX.

*ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU

(International Telecommunication Union).

Front speakers (FR and FL)

The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus

effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from

the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker

from each side of the video monitor should be the same.

Center speaker (C)

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds

(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical

to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,

however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front

face of the center speaker with the front face of your video

monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front

speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as

directly over or under it.

Surround speakers (SR and SL)

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround

sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening

position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above

the floor.

Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL)

The surround back speakers supplement the surround

speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back

transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the

listening position and at the same height as the surround

speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in)

apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width

as the front speakers.

Subwoofer

The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active

Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only

for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels,

but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and

DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so

critical, because low bass sounds are not highly

directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the

front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the

room to reduce wall reflections.

Presence speakers (PR and PL)

Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front

speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA

DSP (see page 61). These effects include sounds that

filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the

screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place

these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 – 1 m

(1 – 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly

inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor.

Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound

simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers

using the PRIORITY parameter in MANUAL SETUP (see

page 77).

CONNECTIONS

Before connecting speakers

More than 30 cm (12 in)

60˚

30˚

PL

PR

SBR

SBL

FL

FR

C

SL

SR

SR

80˚

SL

1.8 m (6 ft)

1.8 m (6 ft)

Note

13

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■Di-pole speaker layout

Either di-pole or direct radiating speaker types can be used

for THX surround. If you choose di-pole speakers, please

place the surround and surround back speakers according

to the speaker layout below.

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R),

“+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are

faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the

polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound

will be unnatural and lack bass.

• If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set this unit’s speaker

impedance setting to 6 ohms before using (see page 29). If you

will use 8 ohm speakers, use this unit’s initial setting for

speaker impedance.

• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is

disconnected from the power source.

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let

them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this

unit and/or speakers.

• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still

creates interference with the monitor, place the speakers away

from the monitor.

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side

by side. One cable is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a

stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable

to the “+” (red) terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect

the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.

■Connecting to the speaker terminals

FRONT terminals

Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals.

If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of

the FRONT A or B terminals.

The Canada model cannot output to two paris of speaker systems

simultaneously.

CENTER terminals

Connect a center speaker to these terminals.

SURROUND ZONE 2(3) terminals

Connect surround speakers to these terminals.

SUBWOOFER jack

Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the

YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

to this jack.

SURROUND BACK terminals

Connect surround back speakers to these terminals.

If you only connect one surround back speaker, connect it

to the left (L) terminals.

FL

SR

SL

FR

C

SBR

SBL

: Di-pole speaker

: Direction of the di-pole speaker phase

Connecting speakers

Note

Note

CAUTION

14

CONNECTIONS

1Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8 in) of

insulation from each of the speaker cables.

2Twist the exposed wires of the cable together

to prevent short circuits.

3Loosen the knob using the supplied speaker

terminal wrench.

4Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side

of each terminal.

5Tighten the knob to secure the wire using the

supplied speaker terminal wrench.

6Hook the speaker terminal wrench onto

WRENCH HOLDER on the rear panel of this

unit when not in use.

10 mm (3/8 in)

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Speaker terminal wrench

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Speaker terminal wrench

15

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) terminals

Connect presence speakers to these terminals.

You can also use these terminals to connect the Zone 2 speakers

(see page 103).

1Open the tab.

2Insert one bare wire into the hole of each

terminal.

3Return the tab to secure the wire.

■Connecting the banana plug

(With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models)

First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug

connector into the end of the corresponding terminal.

y

You can also use banana plugs with the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3)

speaker terminals. Open the tab, then insert one banana plug

connector into the hole of each terminal. Do not attempt to close

the tabs after connecting the banana plugs.

■Speaker layout

Refer to the following illustration as to where to place

each speaker in your listening room.

1 Subwoofer

2 Front right speaker

3 Front left speaker

4 Center speaker

5 Surround back right speaker

6 Surround back left speaker

7 Surround right speaker

8 Surround left speaker

9 Presence right speaker

10 Presence left speaker

Note

Banana plug

(With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models)

1

2

3

4

5

6

9

10

8

7

16

CONNECTIONS

SPEAKERS

FRONT

SURROUND

FRONT CENTER

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE

SURROUND/ZONE 2(3)

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

SURROUND BACK

SINGLE

CENTER

SINGLE

(SB)

RL

R

R

L

L

RL

RL

RL

RL

+

–

+

–

+

–

+

+

––

–

+

+

+

+

+

–

–

–

–

A

B

PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3)

Center

speaker

Front speakers (A)

Surround back speakers

LeftRight

LeftRight LeftRight

Surround speakers

Front

speakers

(B)

LeftRight

Presence speakers

• You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously. You can set

to prioritize either set of speakers using the PRIORITY parameter in MANUAL SETUP (see page 77).

• The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and operate

only when the Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES, Dolby Pro Logic x, THX Select2, THX Music, THX Games or THX Surround EX

decoder is turned on.

• The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields

are selected.

Subwoofer with

built-in amplifier

(U.S.A. model)

17

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Some of the speakers commercially available these days

have speaker wire connections that allow bi-wiring or bi-

amplification to enhance the performance of the speaker

system. This unit allows you to make bi-wire and bi-AMP

connections to one speaker system. Check if your speakers

support bi-wiring or bi-amplification. As these speakers

are shipped to you, you will note gold-plated shorting bars

or bridges, one connecting the two red input terminals and

the other connecting the two black input terminals.

Remove these shorting bars or bridges only if you plan to

bi-wire or bi-AMP your speakers.

■Conventional connection

If you want to connect your speakers as traditional

loudspeakers using the conventional connection method,

connect your speakers using the regular left and right

speaker wire connections and ignore the second set of

terminals.

■Bi-wire connection

The bi-wire connection separates the woofer from the

combined midrange and tweeter section. A bi-wire

compatible speaker has four binding post terminals. These

two sets of terminals allow the speaker to be split into two

independent sections. This split connects the mid and high

frequency drivers to one set of terminals and the low

frequency driver to the other pair.

• Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the LPF (low

pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers.

• To use the bi-wire connections, press SPEAKERS A on the

front panel so that SP A lights up in the front panel display.

■Bi-AMP connection

The bi-AMP connection uses two amplifiers for both

speakers. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section

of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the

combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement

each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range.

This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much

simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence

the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the

speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high

pass filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes

frequencies below a cutoff and rejects frequencies above

the cutoff frequency. Likewise, the HPF passes

frequencies above its cutoff.

• Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the LPF (low

pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers.

• To activate the bi-AMP connections, set BI-AMP to ON in

ADVANCED SETUP (see page 89).

• To make the bi-AMP connections, use the FRONT and

SURROUND BACK terminals as shown below.

Using bi-wire and bi-AMP

connections

Notes

FRONT

RL

+

–

+

–

+

+

–

–

A

B

This unit

Shorting bars

or bridges

Shorting bars

or bridges

Notes

FRONT

RL

+

–

+

–

+

+

–

–

A

B

This unit

FRONT

RL

A

SINGLE

+

–

+

–

SURROUND BACK

RL

+

–

+

–

This unit

18

CONNECTIONS

Do not connect this unit or other components to the main

power until all connections between components are

complete.

■Cable indications

■Analog jacks

You can input analog signals from audio components by

connecting audio pin cables to the analog jacks on this

unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs

to the left jacks.

■Digital jacks

This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital

signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You

can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both

the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to

signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks

are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals.

This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus

audio signals input at the analog jacks are only output at the

analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise, audio signals input at the

digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output at the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.

Information on cables and jacks

used for connections

CAUTION

S

V

O

L

R

C

left analog cables

right analog cables

optical cables

coaxial cables

video cables

S-video cables

For analog signals

For digital signals

For video signals

For HDMI signals

Note

19

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■Audio jacks

This unit has four types of audio jacks (analog audio, digital audio coaxial, digital audio optical and HDMI). Connection

depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other components.

AUDIO jacks

For conventional analog audio signals.

DIGITAL AUDIO (COAXIAL) jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via digital coaxial

cables.

DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via digital optical

cables.

HDMI jacks

For HDMI digital audio signals.

■Audio signal flow for OUT (REC)

• The audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack are output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks only and are not output at the

analog OUT (REC) jacks.

• 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack can be output at

the HDMI OUT jack only when HDMI SET is set to OTHER (see page 80).

• 2-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS signals except multi-channel PCM signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack can be

output at the DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) jacks.

• Copy-protected 2-channel PCM signals with over 48 kHz/16 bit input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack are not output at the

DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) jacks.

DIGITAL AUDIO

(COAXIAL)

AUDIO

HDMI

DIGITAL AUDIO

(OPTICAL)

RL

Notes

DIGITAL AUDIO

(OPTICAL)

DIGITAL AUDIO

(COAXIAL)

HDMI

AUDIO

Digital output

Output

OUT (REC)

Input

Analog output

Digital audio

Analog audio

Through

20

CONNECTIONS

■Video jacks

This unit has four types of video jacks (composite, component, S-video and HDMI). Connection depends on the

availability of input jacks on your monitor. When V CONV. is set to ON (see page 83), the analog video signals input at

the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks can be output at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT

VIDEO jacks interchangeably. In addition, when V CONV. is set to ON (see page 83) and

HDMI I/P is set to ON (see page 84), the analog video signals input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT

VIDEO jacks can be digitally up-converted and output at the HDMI OUT jack.

VIDEO jacks

For conventional composite video signals.

S VIDEO jacks

For S-video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and

color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color

reproduction.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and

color difference (PB, PR) to provide the best quality in

picture reproduction.

HDMI jacks

For HDMI digital video signals.

■Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT

• The analog video signals output at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks can be deinterlaced from 480i to 480p. Set CMPNT I/P to ON in

MANUAL SETUP to activate this feature (see page 83).

• The analog video signals input at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks and output at the S VIDEO or VIDEO jacks cannot be converted to

480p/1080i/720p.

• When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the input

signals is as follows where the analog video signals input at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks have the top priority.

1. COMPONENT VIDEO

2. S VIDEO

3. VIDEO

• Component interlace/progressive conversion (see page 83) and HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion (see page 84) are available

only when V CONV. is set to ON (see page 83).

VIDEO S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y P

B

P

R

HDMI

Notes

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

Through

Output

(MONITOR OUT)

Input

Component interlace/progressive conversion (see page 83)

HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion (see page 84)

Digital video

Analog video

21

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

This unit has the HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks for digital audio and video signal input as well as the HDMI OUT

jack for digital audio and video signal output. Connect the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit to the HDMI OUT

jack of other HDMI components (such as a DVD player). Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN jack

of other HDMI components (such as a TV and a projector).

The video or audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack you selected using the HDMI IN menu in I/O

ASSIGNMENT (see page 81) or the INPUT selector on the front panel are output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. In

addition, the audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack are output to speakers, headphones and the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.

• We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.

• Digital audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT jacks.

• Some audio signals may not be output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks depending on the signal type.

• The analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and component video jacks can be digitally up-converted to be output

at the HDMI OUT jack. Set HDMI I/P to ON in MANUAL SETUP to activate this feature (see page 84).

Connecting HDMI components

Notes

IN 1

IN 2

OUT

HDMI

Cable TV or

Satellite tuner

Video

monitor

HDMI out

DVD Player HDMI out

HDMI in

(U.S.A. model)

22

CONNECTIONS

■Connecting a DVD player

Check the availability of jacks on your DVD player and select one type of connection for audio/video input/output. However, in case

you make an HDMI connection, you can make both audio and video connections using a single HDMI cable.

Connecting video components

Note

RL

MONITOR OUT

AUDIOVIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

VIDEO

OUTPUT

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

DVD

DVD

COAXIAL

COMPONENT VIDEO

PR

MONITOR OUT

PBY

DVD

C

OLR

IN 1

IN 2

OUT

HDMI

DVD player

Video

monitor

Coaxial out Video out

Audio out

Video in

Optical out

HDMI out

HDMI in

(U.S.A. model)

23

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■Connecting other video components

Check the availability of jacks on your other video components and select one type of connection for audio/video input/output.

However, in case you make an HDMI connection, you can make both audio and video connections using a single HDMI cable.

Note

RL

AUDIOVIDEO

S VIDEO

CBL/

SAT

VIDEO

OUT

VCR 1

IN

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

CBL/SAT

COAXIAL

DVR/

VCR 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

PRPBY

DTV

CBL/

SAT

IN 1

IN 2

OUT

HDMI

O

LR

LR LR

C

Cable TV or

satellite tuner

DVD recorder

or VCR

Audio out

Video out

Optical out

Audio out

Video out

Video out

Audio in

Coaxial out

HDMI in

HDMI out

Video

monitor

(U.S.A. model)

HDMI out

24

CONNECTIONS

■Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and

SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or

pre-amplifier.

If you set INPUT CH to 8ch in MULTI CH SET (see page 82), you can use the input jacks assigned as FRONT in

MULTI CH SET (see page 82) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals.

Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to

match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.

• When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you

cannot select sound field programs.

• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that

you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.

• When headphones are used, only front L/R channels are output.

■Connecting to the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel

Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a game console or video camera, to this unit.

Notes

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT

FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)

SURROUND

RL

RL

AUDIO

DVD

DTV

CBL/

SAT

IN

OUT

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

IN

AUDIO

(PLAY)

IN

(PLAY)

IN

OUT

(REC)

OUT

(REC)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

CD

LRLR

L

R

FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)

SURROUND

LR

LR

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT

Multi-format player/

External decoder

Multi-format player/

External decoder

For 6-channel input For 8-channel input

Front

out

Surround

out

Subwoofer

out

Center

out

Front out

Surround out

Subwoofer

out

Center

out

Surround

back out

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

O

V

S

L

R

Game

console or

video camera

Video out

S-video out

Audio out L

Audio out R

Optical out

25

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

• Check the availability of jacks on your audio components and select one type of connection for audio/video input/output.

• PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC

cartridge, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks.

• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in the signal. However you may hear less noise without the connection to

the GND terminal for some record players.

Connecting audio components

Notes

RL

AUDIO

(PLAY)

IN

(PLAY)

IN

OUT

(REC)

OUT

(REC)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

CD

PHONO

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

MD/TAPE

CD-R

CD

CD

COAXIAL

GND

O

LRLRLR LR

LRLR

C

O

O

CD player

MD recorder or

tape deck

CD recorder

Turntable

Optical out

Coaxial out

Audio in

Optical in

Optical in

Audio inAudio out

Audio out

GND

Audio out

Audio out

(U.S.A. model)

26

CONNECTIONS

■Connecting an external amplifier

If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,

or want to use another amplifier, connect an external

amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows.

• When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for

output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the

corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the

external amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum.

• The signal output at the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE

OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings.

• If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is set to

ZONE B (see page 85), signals will only be output at the

FRONT PRE OUT jacks.

1FRONT PRE OUT jacks

Front channel line output jacks.

2SURROUND PRE OUT jacks

Surround channel line output jacks.

3SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack

Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the

YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

to this jack.

4SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT

jacks

Surround back or presence channel line output jacks. If

you only connect one external amplifier for the surround

back channel, connect it to the left (L) jack.

5CENTER PRE OUT jack

Center channel line output jack.

• Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signal as the

corresponding speaker terminals. However, when both surround

back and presence speakers are setup in this unit, the signals

output at SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks

may not correspond to the correct speakers.

• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on

the subwoofer.

• Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE

OUT jack depending on the SPEAKER SET settings (see

page 76).

Notes

Notes

FRONT

SURROUND

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE

CENTER

SINGLE

(SB)

RL

RL

RL

1

2

3

4

5

27

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal

strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals.

■Connecting the AM loop antenna

1Set up the AM loop antenna.

2Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop

antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND

terminals.

3Orient the AM loop antenna for the best

reception.

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

• A property installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception

than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an

outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest

authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor

antennas.

Connecting the antennas

TUNER

FM ANT

75Ω

UNBAL.

AM ANTGND

AM loop antenna

(included)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum interference,

connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth

ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven

into moist earth.

Indoor FM antenna

(included)

(U.S.A. model)

Notes

28

CONNECTIONS

■Connecting the AC power cable

Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC inlet after

all other connections are complete, then plug the AC

power cable to an AC wall outlet.

Use the supplied AC cable. Do not use other AC power cables as

doing so may result in fire hazard or electrical shock.

■AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED)

Use these 2 outlets to supply power to any connected

components. Connect the AC power cables of your other

components to these 2 outlets. Power to these 2 outlets is

supplied when the main room, Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned

on. However, power to these 2 outlets is cut off when the

main room, Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned off or when

MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed and

released outward to the OFF position. The maximum

power or the total power consumption of the components

that can be connected to these 2 outlets is 100 W.

When all connections are complete, turn on the power of

this unit.

1Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel

inward to the ON position to turn on the

power of this unit.

• Only this unit is turned on.

• Zone 2 and Zone 3 are set to the standby mode.

2Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel

(or STANDBY on the remote control) to set

this unit to the standby mode.

Connecting the power cable

CAUTION

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost. However, the stored data will be lost

in case the power cord is disconnected from the AC

wall outlet for more than one week.

AC OUTLETS

AC IN

100W MAX.TOTAL

SWITCHED

(U.S.A. model)

Turning on and off this unit

VOLUME

EDIT

SEARCH MODE CATEGORY

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

FM/AM

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

hA/B/C/D/E

AUDIO SELECT

TONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT ZONE CONTROL

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

OPTIMIZER MIC

ON/OFF ON/OFF

ON :OFF

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

BA

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT

PROGRAM

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

2,3

1,4

(U.S.A. model)

MASTER

ON OFF

ON/OFF

STANDBY

or

Front panel Remote control

29

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

3Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, ZONE 2 ON/OFF

or ZONE 3 ON/OFF on the front panel (or

POWER on the remote control) to turn on this

unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3.

y

• When MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON

position, you can also press POWER or STANDBY on the

remote control to turn on or set this unit, Zone 2 and Zone

3 to the standby mode simultaneously.

• For details about controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3 using the

remote control, see page 104.

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, ZONE 2 ON/OFF and ZONE 3

ON/OFF on the front panel as well as POWER and

STANDBY on the remote control are operational only when

MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position.

4Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel

again to release it outward to the OFF

position to turn off this unit.

This unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned off.

Follow the procedure below to change the impedance

setting for all speakers.

If you are using 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to

6 ohms before using this unit.

1Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to

release it outward to the OFF position to set

this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby

mode.

2Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the

front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF

inward to the ON position to turn on the

power of this unit.

SP IMP.–8ΩMIN appears in the front panel display.

3Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front

panel repeatedly to select the impedance of

your speakers.

• Select 6 ohms if you are using 6 ohm speakers.

4Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to

release it outward to the OFF position to save

the new setting and set this unit, Zone 2 and

Zone 3 to the standby mode.

This unit will be set to the standby mode.

You can also set the speaker impedance by using the SP

IMP. parameter in the ADVANCED SETUP menu (see

page 88).

Note

ON/OFF

POWER

or

Front panel Remote control

MASTER

ON OFF

Setting the speaker impedance

CAUTION

Note

MASTER

ON OFF

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

MASTER

ON OFF

SP IMP.-8 MIN

ADVANCED SETUP

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

MASTER

ON OFF

AUTO SETUP

30

This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room

Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you

avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and

achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied

optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound

your speakers produce in your actual listening

environment.

• Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be

output during the AUTO SETUP procedure.

• If the AUTO SETUP procedure stops and error messages

appear on the screen, follow the troubleshooting on page 113.

YPAO performs the following checks and makes

appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible

sound from your system.

WIRING

Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of

each speaker.

DISTANCE

Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening

position and adjusts the timing of each channel.

SIZE

Checks the speaker’s frequency response and sets the

appropriate low frequency crossover for each channel.

EQ

Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric

equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and

create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly

important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers

for some channels or have a room with unique sonic

characteristics.

YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three

parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the

seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly

precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics.

LEVEL

Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker.

1Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

• After you have completed the AUTO SETUP procedure, be sure

to disconnect the optimizer microphone.

• The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat.

– Keep it away from direct sunlight.

– Do not place it on top of this unit.

2Place the optimizer microphone on a flat

level surface with the omni-directional

microphone head upward, at your normal

listening position.

If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer

mic at the same height as your ears would be when

you are seated in your listening position.

AUTO SETUP

Introduction

Notes

Optimizer microphone setup

Notes

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

OPTIMIZER MIC

ON :OFF

MASTER

BA

Optimizer microphone position

31

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION

For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible

during the AUTO SETUP procedure (YPAO). If there is

too much ambient noise, the results may not be

satisfactory.

y

• You can run AUTO SETUP using the system menu that appears

in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual uses the

OSD illustrations to explain the AUTO SETUP procedure.

• If an error occurs during the AUTO SETUP procedure and an

error message appears in the front panel display, see pages 113

and 114 for a complete list of error messages and proper

remedies.

• If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the

crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or

slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum.

1Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press

SET MENU to enter the SET MENU.

2Press k / n to select AUTO SETUP and then

press ENTER to enter the main menu.

3Press n to select SETUP and then press

l / h to select:

AUTO

To automatically perform the entire AUTO SETUP

procedure.

RELOAD

To restore the last AUTO SETUP setting.

RELOAD is available only when you have previously run

the AUTO SETUP procedure.

Using AUTO SETUP

CROSSOVER

HIGH CUT

MIN MAX

Subwoofer

VOLUME

MIN MAX

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

MENU

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

BAND

SRCH MODE

NIGHT

AUDI O

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

1

2B

THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

90

+10

ENT.

5678

MACROONOFF

A

SPEAKERSMEMORY

EXIT

PURE DIRECT

TOP

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

VOLUME

+

–

POWER POWER POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDI O SE L

A

CH

+

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

+

–

AMP

SOURCE

TV

PRESET

XM

PRESET/CH PURE DIRECT

SET MENU

ON SCREEN

XM MEMORY

STRAIGHT

A-E/CAT.

1

2-9

1

(U.S.A. model)

Note

AMP

SOURCE

TV

SET MENU

MENU

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH



SET MENU

. ;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

. ;INFORMATION

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

p

p

32

AUTO SETUP

4Press k / n repeatedly to select WIRING,

DISTANCE, SIZE, EQ or LEVEL.

5When WIRING, DISTANCE, SIZE or LEVEL is

selected, press l / h to select:

CHECK

To automatically check and adjust the selected item.

SKIP

To skip the selected item and perform no adjustments.

When using THX speakers, set SIZE to SKIP and make sure

that SML or SMLx2 is selected in SPEAKER SET (see

page 76) and that 80Hz is selected in CROSS OVER (see

page 77).

When EQ is selected, press l / h to select:

NATURAL

To average out the frequency response of all speakers

with higher frequencies being less emphasized.

Recommended if the FLAT setting sounds a little

harsh.

FLAT

To average the frequency response of all speakers.

Recommended if all of your speakers are of similar

quality.

FRONT

To adjust the frequency response of each speaker in

accordance with the sound of your front speakers.

Recommended if your front speakers are of much

higher quality than your other speakers.

SKIP

To skip the selected item and perform no adjustments.

6Press n to select START and then press

ENTER.

Loud test tones will be output from each speaker and

WAIT appears during the AUTO SETUP procedure.

If E-10:INTERNAL ERROR appears during testing, restart

the procedure from step 3.

■If you selected AUTO in step 5

The RESULT display appears for a few seconds after each

check, then settings of the next item will start. The

RESULT:EXIT display appears after all items are set.

7Press k / n to select RESULT and then press

ENTER to display the AUTO SETUP results.

y

• Press l / h repeatedly to move between each display.

• If you are not satisfied with the result or want to manually

adjust each setup parameter, run MANUAL SETUP (see

page 73).

Note

Note

1

AUTO:MENU

.SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO

WIRING;;;;;;CHECK

DISTANCE;;;;CHECK

SIZE;;;;;;;;CHECK

EQ;;;;;;;;;;NATURAL

LEVEL;;;;;;;CHECK

START

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

p

p

RESULT:EXIT

WARNING

RESULT

. SP:5/4/0.1

. DIST:4.5/6.1m

. LVL:-10.0/+6.5dB

. >SET CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

p

p

RESULT:WIRING

FRONT L;;;;;;;OK

FRONT L;;;;4.5m

CENTER;;;;;5.2m

FRONT R;;;;4.8m

PRNS L;;;;;5.2m

PRNS R;;;;;5.3m

RESULT:DISTANCE1

[<]/[>]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

FRONT L;;;;;;LRG

RESULT:SIZE

CENTER 1:100Hz;;;+2.5dB

2:300Hz;;;-0.5dB

3:1.5kHz;;+0.5dB

4:1.8kHz;;+2.5dB

5:1.8kHz;;-3.5dB

6:2.5kHz;;+2.5dB

7:10kHz;;;+2.5dB

RESULT:EQ

[<]/[>]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

FRONT L;;;+1.0dB

CENTER;;;;-1.5dB

FRONT R;;;+6.5dB

PRNS L;;;-10.0dB

PRNS R;;;;+1.0dB

RESULT:LEVEL1

[<]/[>]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

[<]/[>]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

[<]/[>]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

Results of the speaker

connection and wiring

Results of the speaker

distance from the

listening position

Results of the

frequency response of

each speaker

Results of the

parametric equalizer of

each speaker

Results of the volume

level of each speaker

33

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION

• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of

your listening environment, run AUTO SETUP again to

re-calibrate your system.

• In the DISTANCE results, the distance displayed may be

longer than the actual distance depending on the

characteristics of your subwoofer.

• In the EQ results, different values may be set for the same

band to provide finer adjustments.

8Press ENTER to return to the RESULT:EXIT

screen.

9Make sure that the pointer is pointing at SET

and CANCEL and then press l / h to select

SET or CANCEL.

• Select SET to confirm the AUTO SETUP results.

• Select CANCEL to cancel the AUTO SETUP

results.

10 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.

The SET MENU screen appears in the OSD.

■If you selected RELOAD in step 5

The RESULT:EXIT display appears.

7Make sure that the pointer is pointing at SET

and CANCEL and then press l / h to select

SET or CANCEL.

• Select SET to confirm the AUTO SETUP results.

• Select CANCEL to cancel the AUTO SETUP

results.

8Press ENTER to confirm your selection.

The SET MENU screen appears in the OSD.

Notes

RESULT:EXIT

WARNING

RESULT

. SP:5/4/0.1

. DIST:4.5/6.1m

. LVL:-10.0/+6.5dB

. >SET CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

p

p



SET MENU

. ;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

. ;INFORMATION

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

p

p

RESULT:EXIT

WARNING

RESULT

. SP:5/4/0.1

. DIST:4.5/6.1m

. LVL:-10.0/+6.5dB

. >SET CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

p

p



SET MENU

. ;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

. ;INFORMATION

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

p

p

PLAYBACK

34

Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS.

If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage

your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player

before you play back a CD encoded in DTS.

1Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or set

AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press

POWER on the remote control) to turn on the

power of this unit.

2Turn on the power of the video monitor

connected to this unit.

3Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel

(or press SPEAKERS A or B on the remote

control).

Each time you press SPEAKERS A or B, the

respective speakers are turned on or off.

When bi-wiring, select both A and B.

4Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or press one of the input selector buttons on

the remote control) to select the desired

input source.

The name of the currently selected input source

appears in the front panel display and on the video

monitor for a few seconds.

5Start playback or select a broadcast station

on the source component.

Refer to the operation instructions for the component.

See page 44 for details about tuning instructions.

PLAYBACK

CAUTION

Basic operations

VOLUME

EDIT

SEARCH MODE CATEGORY

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

FM/AM

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

h

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO SELECT

TONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT ZONE CONTROL

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

OPTIMIZER MIC

ON/OFF ON/OFF

ON :OFF

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

BA

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT

PROGRAM

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

14

76

3

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

MENU

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

BAND

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

NIGHT

AUDI O

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

1

2B

THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

90

+10

ENT.

5678

MACROONOFF

A

SPEAKERSMEMORY

EXIT

PURE DIRECT

TOP

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

VOLUME

+

–

POWER POWER POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDI O SE L

A

CH

+

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

+

–

AMP

SOURCE

TV

PRESET

XM

PRESET/CH PURE DIRECT

SET MENU

ON SCREEN

XM MEMORY

STRAIGHT

1

7

4

63

1

(U.S.A. model)

(U.S.A. model)

ON/OFF

POWER

Front panel

Remote control

or

AMP

SOURCE

TV

Note

SPEAKERS

BA

B

+10

ENT.

A

SPEAKERS

or

Front panel Remote control

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

INPUT

Front panel Remote control

or

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

A.SEL: AUTO

INPUT: DVD

Name of the currently selected input source

35

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

6Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press

VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust

the volume to the desired output level.

7Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front

panel (or press one of the sound field

program buttons on the remote control) to

select the desired sound field program.

The name of the selected sound field program appears

in the front panel display and on the video monitor.

See page 61 for details about sound field programs.

• Choose a sound field program based on your listening

preference, and not on the name of the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last sound field program used with that source.

• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the

MULTI CH INPUT is selected.

■Notes on Dialogue Normalization

(Dial Norm)

Dialogue Normalization (Dial Norm) is a feature of Dolby

Digital and DTS, which is used to keep the programs at

the same average listening level so the user does not have

to change the volume control between Dolby Digital and

DTS programs. When playing back software which has

been encoded in Dolby Digital and DTS, sometimes you

may see a brief message in the front panel display which

will read “Dial Norm X dB” (X being a numeric value).

The display is showing how the program level relates with

THX calibration level. If you want to play the program at

calibrated theatrical levels, you may wish to adjust the

volume.

For example, if you see the following message:

“Dial Norm + 4 dB” in the front panel display, to keep the

overall output level at THX calibrated loudness, just turn

down the volume control by 4dB. However, unlike a

movie theater where the playback loudness is preset, you

can choose your preferred volume setting for best

enjoyment.

Notes

VOLUME

VOLUME

+

–

or

Remote control

Front panel

PROGRAM

1

2B

THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

90

+10

ENT.

5678

A

SPEAKERSMEMORY

Remote control

Front panel

or

HiFi DSP

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Hall in Vienna

MUSIC

Program name

Name of the sound field category

DialNorm;;+4dB

36

PLAYBACK

■Adjusting the tonal quality

Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for

the front L/R and center speaker channels.

1Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel

repeatedly to select TREBLE or BASS.

2Rotate the PROGRAM selector to adjust the

high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the

low-frequency response (BASS).

3Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select

BYPASS and cancel the tone control.

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the

low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of

the surround speakers may not match that of the front L/R and

center speakers.

• TONE CONTROL is not effective when THX (see page 38) or

PURE DIRECT (see page 39) is selected, or when

MULTI CH INPUT is selected.

■Muting the sound output

Use this feature to mute the sound output.

1Press MUTE on the remote control.

The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel

display.

2Press MUTE again (or press VOLUME +/–) to

resume the sound output.

The MUTE indicator disappears from the display.

y

You can adjust how much the muting function reduces the sound

output (see page 80).

■Using SILENT CINEMA

Use this feature to enjoy multi-channel music or movie

sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS surround,

through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA

activates automatically whenever you connect headphones

to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or

HiFi DSP sound field programs. When activated, the

SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel

display.

SILENT CINEMA is ineffective in the following cases:

– MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input mode.

– PURE DIRECT is selected.

– A 2ch Stereo program is selected.

– This unit is in the STRAIGHT mode.

Additional operations

Notes

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

TONE CONTROL

Note

MUTE

MUTE

Flashes

MUTE

VOLUME

+

–

or

37

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

■Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT

Press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel or

MULTI CH IN on the remote control so that MULTI

CH INPUT appears in the front panel display and

on the video monitor.

When MULTI CH INPUT is shown in the front panel display and

the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select

another input source with the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or one of the input selector buttons on the remote control), press

MULTI CH INPUT so that MULTI CH INPUT disappears from

the front panel display and the video monitor.

■Enjoying multi-channel software in

6.1/7.1 channel surround

If you connected one or two surround back speakers, use

this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for

multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic x,

Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders.

1Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press

EXTD SUR. on the remote control to switch

between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1 channel playback.

2Press l / h repeatedly to select a decoder

when the name of a decoder (PL xMovie, for

example) is displayed in the front panel

display.

Auto

AUTO

If a signal flag can be recognized, the unit selects the

optimum decoder to play back the signal in 6.1/7.1

channels. If the signal flag cannot be recognized, or

no flag is present in the input signal, this unit cannot

automatically play back the signal in 6.1/7.1

channels.

Decoders

You can select a decoder from the following list

depending on the format of the software you are

playing.

PL xMovie

To play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1

channels using the Pro Logic x movie decoder.

PL xMusic

To play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1

channels using the Pro Logic x music decoder.

EX/ES

To play back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1

channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.

DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels

using the DTS-ES decoder.

EX

To play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1

channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.

OFF

To play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 5.1

channels.

y

When SB L/R SP is set to LRGx1 or SMLx1 (see page 77), the

surround back channel will output from the left SURROUND

BACK speaker terminals.

• Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal flag

which cannot be automatically detected. When you play these

kinds of discs in 6.1-channel, select decoders (PL xMovie,

PL xMusic, EX/ES or EX) manually.

• 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible even if EXTD SUR. is

pressed in the following cases:

– When SUR. L/R SP or SB L/R SP is set to NONE

(see page 77).

– When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks

are being played.

– When the source being played does not contain surround L/R

channel signals.

– When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.

– When 2ch Stereo, 7ch Stereo or PURE DIRECT is selected.

• When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be

reset to AUTO.

• The Pro Logic x decoder is not available when SB L/R SP is

set to NONE (see page 77).

• PL xMovie cannot be selected when SB L/R SP is set to

LRGx1 or SMLx1 (see page 77).

Note

MULTI CH

INPUT

MULTI CH IN

Front panel Remote control

or

EXTD SUR.

8

AMP

SOURCE

TV

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Notes

II

II

38

PLAYBACK

■Enjoying 2-channel software in surround

Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played

back in multiple channels.

1Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press

STANDARD on the remote control to switch

between the Surround and Enhanced

programs.

You can also press MOVIE or THX on the remote

control to select the MOVIE THEATER or THX

programs.

2Press SELECT on the remote control to

select a decoder.

You can select a decoder from the following list

depending on the type of software you are playing

and your personal preference.

Decoder types for the Surround program.

<PRO LOGIC>

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.

<PL x Movie>

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software.

<PL x Music>

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music software.

<PL x Game>

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for game software.

<Neo:6 Cinema>

DTS processing for movie software.

<Neo:6 Music>

DTS processing for music software.

Decoder types for the Enhanced, MOVIE

THEATER or THX program

<PRO LOGIC>

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.

<PL x Movie>

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software.

<Neo:6 Cinema>

DTS processing for movie software.

y

• You can also select a decoder by using DECODER MODE in

INPUT MENU (see page 82).

• You can also select a decoder by pressing l / h on the remote

control when the decoder type is displayed in the short message

display.

The Pro Logic x decoder automatically changes to the

Pro Logic decodeer when SB L/R SP is set to NONE

(see page 77).

STANDARD

6

AMP

SOURCE

TV

MOVIE

4

THX

5

or

SELECT

7

II

II

II

Note

II

39

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

■Using PURE DIRECT

PURE DIRECT bypasses the decoders and DSP

processors of this unit as well as shuts down the video

circuitry, allowing you to enjoy the highest possible sound

fidelity from analog and PCM sources.

• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in

the PURE DIRECT mode.

• When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input,

this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog

input. When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will be

heard.

• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.

• TONE CONTROL on the front panel and the OSD menu

settings are ineffective in the PURE DIRECT mode.

• The following operations are not possible in the PURE

DIRECT mode:

– switching the sound field program

– displaying the short message

– adjusting OSD menu parameters

– all video functions including video conversions

– HDMI digital video up-conversion of analog video signals

– HDMI features including digital input and output

• PURE DIRECT is automatically canceled whenever this unit is

set to the standby mode.

1Press PURE DIRECT on the front panel or on

the remote control to activate pure direct.

The indicator around the button on the front panel

lights up and the front panel display automatically

goes out.

The front panel display switches on momentarily when an

operation is performed.

2Press PURE DIRECT on the front panel or on

the remote control again to deactivate pure

direct.

The indicator around the button on the front panel

goes out and the previous settings are restored.

■Using the night listening modes

The night listening modes are designed to improve

listenability at lower volume levels or at night. Choose

either NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on

the type of source you are playing.

• You cannot use the night listening modes if PURE DIRECT or

MULTI CH INPUT are being used or if headphones are

connected even though the NIGHT indicator lights up when

PURE DIRECT is selected.

• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending

on the input source and the surround sound settings being used.

1Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press

NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to

select NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC.

When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT

indicator in the front panel display lights up in the

front panel display.

• Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to

reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and

make dialog easier to hear at lower volume levels.

• Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music

sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.

• Select NIGHT:OFF if you do not want to use this

function.

2Press l / h to adjust the effect level of

compression while NIGHT:CINEMA or

NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed.

Choices: MIN, MID, MAX

• Select MIN for minimum compression.

• Select MID for standard compression.

• Select MAX for maximum compression.

y

NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC settings are stored

independently.

Notes

Note

PURE DIRECT

PURE DIRECT

Front panel Remote control

or

PURE DIRECT

PURE DIRECT

Front panel Remote control

or

Notes

NIGHT

AUDIO

AMP

SOURCE

TV

NIGHT

Lights up

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Remote control

Effect.Lvl:MID

40

PLAYBACK

■Using the sleep timer

Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the

standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep

timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit

is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also

automatically turns off any external components

connected to the AC OUTLETS.

1Select an input source and start playback on

the source component.

2Press SLEEP on the remote control

repeatedly to set the amount of time.

Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display

changes as shown below.

The SLEEP indicator flashes while switching the

amount of time for the sleep timer.

The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel

display, and the display returns to the selected sound

field program.

3Press SLEEP repeatedly so that SLEEP OFF

appears in the front panel display.

After a few seconds, SLEEP OFF disappears, and the

SLEEP indicator turns off.

y

The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing

STANDBY on the remote control (or MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on

the front panel) to set this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby

mode.

■Downmixing to 2 channels

You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback from multi-

channel sources.

Rotate the PROGRAM selector (or set

AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press

STEREO on the remote control) to select 2ch

Stereo.

2ch Stereo appears in the front panel display.

You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or

BOTH is selected in LFE/BASS OUT (see page 76).

■Listening to unprocessed input signals

When the unit is in the STRAIGHT mode, 2-channel

stereo sources are output only from the front L/R speakers.

Multi-channel sources are decoded straightly into the

appropriate channels without any additional effect

processing.

1Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front

panel or on the remote control to select

STRAIGHT.

STRAIGHT appears in the front panel display.

SLEEP

SLEEP 120min SLEEP 90min

SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF

SLEEP

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

SLEEP00120min

SLEEP 120min

SLEEP

HiFi DSP

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Hall in Vienna

MUSIC

SLEEP

SLEEP

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

SLEEP OFF

Note

2ch Stereo

1

STEREO

AMP

SOURCE

TV

Front panel

or

PROGRAM

Remote control

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

Front panel Remote control

or

41

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

2Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front

panel or on the remote control again to turn

the sound effect back on.

STRAIGHT disappears from the front panel display.

■Virtual CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA

DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates

virtual speakers to reproduce a natural sound field.

If you set SUR. L/R SP to NONE (see page 76), Virtual

CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you

select a CINEMA DSP sound field program.

Virtual CINEMA DSP is ineffective even if SUR. L/R SP is set to

NONE (see page 76) in the following cases:

– If MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.

– If headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

■Playing video sources in the

background

You can combine images from a video source with sound

from an audio source. For example, you can listen to

classical music while enjoying beautiful scenery from the

video source on the video monitor.

Press one of the input selector buttons on the

remote control to select a video source and then

select an audio source.

If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the

MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select

the video source and then press MULTI CH INPUT on the front

panel or on the remote control.

■Selecting audio input modes

This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. You can

select the type of input signal you want to use.

This feature is not available if no digital input jacks (OPTICAL,

COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition, HDMI is not

available as an input mode if HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2

jacks are not assigned. Use I/O ASSIGNMENT in INPUT

MENU to reassign the respective input jacks (see page 81).

Press AUDIO SELECT on the front panel or

AUDIO SEL on the remote control to select an

input mode.

AUTO

Automatically selects input signals in the following

order:

1) HDMI

2) Digital signals*

3) Analog signals

HDMI

Selects only HDMI signals. If no HDMI signals are

input, no sound is output.

COAX/OPT

Selects digital signals input at the OPTICAL or

COAXIAL jacks. Use if HDMI signals are also being

input.

ANALOG

Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are

input, no sound is output.

Note

Note

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

Front panel Remote control

or

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

Audio sources

Video sources

Note

AUDIO

SELECT

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

A.SEL: AUTO

INPUT: DVD

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

AXM

Front panel Remote control

or

Type of the input mode

42

PLAYBACK

y

• We recommend using AUTO in most cases.

• You can designate the default input mode to be selected when

the power of this unit is turned on (see page 84).

• If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any

way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you

make a digital connection between this unit and the player.

• If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder

automatically switches to the appropriate sound field program.

• The input jacks not assigned are not available as input modes.

■Displaying information about the input

source

You can display the type, format and sampling frequency

of the current input signal.

1Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press

SET MENU on the remote control.

The top SET MENU screen appears in the OSD.

2Press n repeatedly and then press ENTER to

select INFORMATION.

The following information appears in the OSD.

Press l / h to toggle between the audio and video

information displays.

Audio information

FORMAT

Signal format display. When the unit cannot detect a

digital signal, it automatically switches to analog

input.

SAMPLING

Sampling frequency. When the unit is unable to

detect the sampling frequency “?” appears.

CHANNEL

Number of source channels in the input signal. For

example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front

channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed

as “3/2/0.1”.

BITRATE

Bit rate. When the unit is unable to detect the bit rate

“– – –” appears.

DIALOGUE

Dialogue normalization information for Dolby

Digital and DTS signals.

FLAG

Flag data encoded in Dolby Digital, DTS and PCM

signals that cue this unit to automatically switch

decoders.

Video information

HDMI Signal Type

Type of the HDMI signals input or output at the

HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this unit.

HDMI Resolution

Resolution of the HDMI signals input or output at the

HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this unit.

Analog Resolution

Resolution of the analog signals input or output at the

video component jacks of this unit.

3Press SET MENU on the remote control again

to exit.

Notes

Note

SET MENU

MENU

SRCH MODE

AMP

SOURCE

TV



SET MENU

. ;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

. ;INFORMATION

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

p

p

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

MENU

SRCH MODE

RECORDING

43

BASIC

OPERATION

Recording adjustments and other operations are

performed from the recording components. Refer to the

operation instructions for those components.

1Turn on the power of this unit and all

connected components.

See page 28 for details.

2Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and

then press one of the input selector buttons)

to select the input source you want to record

from.

3Start playback (or select a broadcast station)

on the source component.

4Start recording on the recording component.

y

Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

• The source you record and the source sent to Zone 2 can be

selected separately.

• When this unit is in the standby mode, you cannot record from

other components connected to this unit.

• The settings for TONE CONTROL (see page 36), VOLUME,

SP LEVEL (see page 78) and programs do not affect recorded

material.

• A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit

cannot be recorded.

• S-video and composite video signals pass independently

through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when

recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source

component is connected to provide only an S-video or only a

composite video signal, you can record only an S-video or only

a composite video signal to your VCR.

• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not

output at the analog AUDIO OUT L/R jacks for recording.

Likewise, analog signals input at the AUDIO IN L/R jacks are

not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your

source component is connected to provide only digital or analog

signals, you can only record digital or analog signals.

• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC)

channel. For example, the signal input at VCR 1 IN is not

output at VCR 1 OUT.

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from

records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may

infringe copyright laws.

• Some HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN

2 jack of this unit may not be output at the DIGITAL AUDIO

(OPTICAL) jacks depending on the type of those HDMI audio

signals.

■Notes on the DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to

digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise

being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to

record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,

the following considerations and adjustments need to be

made.

For DVDs and CDs encoded in DTS, when your player is

compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation

instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will

be output from the player.

RECORDING

VOLUME

EDIT

SEARCH MODE CATEGORY

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

FM/AM

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

h

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO SELECT

TONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT ZONE CONTROL

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

OPTIMIZER MIC

ON/OFF ON/OFF

ON :OFF

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

BA

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT

PROGRAM

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

2

1

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

AMP

SOURCE

TV

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

AXM

Front panel

or

Remote control

Notes

If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the

picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

FM/AM TUNING

44

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

1Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and

then press TUNER on the remote control) to

select TUNER as the input source.

2Press FM/AM on the front panel (or BAND on

the remote control) to select the reception

band.

FM or AM appears in the front panel display.

3Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L)

repeatedly so that the AUTO indicator lights

up in the front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this

unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible.

Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.

4Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once to

begin automatic tuning.

Press h to tune into a higher frequency.

Press l to tune into a lower frequency.

When the unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED

indicator lights up and the frequency of the received

station is shown in the front panel display.

FM/AM TUNING

Automatic tuning

VOLUME

EDIT

SEARCH MODE CATEGORY

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

FM/AM

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

h

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO SELECT

TONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT ZONE CONTROL

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

OPTIMIZER MIC

ON/OFF ON/OFF

ON :OFF

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

BA

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT

PROGRAM

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

1332

4

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

TUNER

AMP

SOURCE

TV

Front panel

or

Remote control

FM/AM

LEVEL

TITLE

BAND

or

Front panel

or

Remote control

AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

AUTO

Lights up

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

AUTO

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

A1:AM 1070 kHz

Name of the sound field program

Frequency of

the received

station

Preset station

group and

number

Reception

band

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

h

AUTO TUNED

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

A1:AM 1530 kHz

45

FM/AM TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

Manual tuning is effective when stations signals are weak.

Manually tuning into an FM station will automatically

change the reception mode to monaural reception to

increase the signal quality.

1Repeat steps 1 and 2 in “Automatic tuning”

to select TUNER and the reception band.

2Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L)

repeatedly so that the AUTO indicator

disappears from the front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this

unit is in the PRESET mode and tuning is not

possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it

off.

3Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to

manually tune into the desired station.

Press h to tune into a higher frequency.

Press l to tune into a lower frequency.

y

Press and hold the button to continue searching.

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store

FM stations. This function enables this unit to

automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals

and store up to 40 (8 stations in each of the 5 groups, A1

to E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any

preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.

You must first set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press

TUNER on the remote control to select TUNER as the input

source.

1Press FM/AM on the front panel (or BAND on

the remote control) to select FM as the

reception band.

2Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that

the AUTO indicator lights up in the front

panel display.

Manual tuning

AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Straight

A1:AM 1070 kHz

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

h

Automatic preset tuning

Note

VOLUME

EDIT

SEARCH MODE CATEGORY

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

FM/AM

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

h

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO SELECT

TONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT ZONE CONTROL

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

OPTIMIZER MIC

ON/OFF ON/OFF

ON :OFF

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

BA

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT

PROGRAM

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

321

(U.S.A. model)

FM/AM

LEVEL

TITLE

BAND

Front panel

or

Remote control

AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

AUTO

Lights up

46

FM/AM TUNING

3Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

on the front panel for more than 3 seconds.

The preset group and number as well as the

MEMORY and AUTO indicators flash. After

approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts

from the currently selected frequency and proceeds

toward the higher frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

• Any station data stored under a preset station number is cleared

when you store a new station under the same preset station

number.

• If the preset number of the received stations does not reach 40

(E8), automatic preset tuning automatically stops after

programming all available stations.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you

want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually

and store it by following the procedure in “Manual preset

tuning”.

■Customized automatic preset tuning

You can specify a preset station group and a preset station

number from which this unit stores the FM stations

received by automatic preset tuning.

1Repeat steps 1 and 2 in “Automatic tuning”.

2Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/TUNING/

CH l / h on the front panel to select the

preset station group and the preset station

number where the first received station will

be stored.

For example, if you select C5, the first received

station is automatically programmed to C5 and the

next received stations are sequentially programmed to

C6, C7, etc.

Automatic preset tuning stops when the received stations have all

been stored up to E8.

Notes

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

AUTO MEMORY

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Straight

C8:FM 87.5 MHz

Note

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost. However, the stored data will be lost

in case the power cord is disconnected from the AC

wall outlet for more than one week.

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

h

47

FM/AM TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

You can also store up to 40 FM or AM stations (8 stations

in each of the 5 groups, A1 to E8) manually.

You must first set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press

TUNER on the remote control to select TUNER as the input

source.

1Repeat steps in “Automatic tuning” or

“Manual tuning” to tune into a station

automatically or manually.

See page 44 for tuning instructions.

When this unit is tuned into a station, the front panel

display shows the frequency of the received station.

2Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the

front panel.

The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds.

3Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel

repeatedly to select a preset station group (A

to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing.

The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:)

appears in the front panel display.

4Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the

front panel to select a preset station number

(1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is

flashing.

Press PRESET/TUNING/CH h on the front panel to

select a higher preset station number.

Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l on the front panel to

select a lower preset station number.

Manual preset tuning

Note

VOLUME

EDIT

SEARCH MODE CATEGORY

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

FM/AM

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

h

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO SELECT

TONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT ZONE CONTROL

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

OPTIMIZER MIC

ON/OFF ON/OFF

ON :OFF

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

BA

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT

PROGRAM

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

3 2,5

4

(U.S.A. model)

TUNED

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

A :AM 630 kHz

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MEMORY

Flashes

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

TUNED

MEMORY

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

C :AM 630 kHz

Preset station group

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

h

TUNED

MEMORY

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

C3:AM 630 kHz

48

FM/AM TUNING

5Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the

front panel while the MEMORY indicator is

flashing.

The station band and frequency appear in the front

panel display with the preset group and number you

have selected.

6Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with

the station frequency.

You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting

the preset station number under which it was stored.

Prior to selecting a preset station, you should preset stations first.

For details, see “Automatic preset tuning” on page 45 or “Manual

preset tuning” on page 47.

1Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and

then press TUNER on the remote control) to

select TUNER as the input source.

2Press A/B/C/D/E (or l / h on the remote

control) to select the preset station group.

The preset group letter appears in the front panel

display and changes each time you press the button.

Notes

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

TUNED

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

C3:AM 630 kHz

Selecting preset stations

Note

VOLUME

EDIT

SEARCH MODE CATEGORY

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

FM/AM

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

h

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO SELECT

TONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT ZONE CONTROL

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

OPTIMIZER MIC

ON/OFF ON/OFF

ON :OFF

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

BA

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT

PROGRAM

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

2

3

1

21

MENU

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

NIGHT

AUDI O

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

3

2

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

1

SET MENU

PRESET/CH

ON SCREEN

XM MEMORY

(U.S.A. model)

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

TUNER

AMP

SOURCE

TV

Front panel

or

Remote control

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

or

Front panel Remote control

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

49

FM/AM TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

3Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET k / n on the remote control) to

select a preset station number (1 through 8).

The preset group and number appear in the front

panel display along with the station band, frequency

and the TUNED indicator lights up.

You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations

with each other. The example below describes the

procedure for exchanging preset station E1 with A5.

1Select preset station E1 by using

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.

See “Selecting preset stations”.

2Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for

more than 3 seconds.

E1 and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

3Select preset station A5 by using

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.

A5 and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

4Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.

The stations stored at the two preset assignments are

exchanged.

or

Front panel Remote control

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

TUNED

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

E1:FM 87.5 MHz

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

h

Exchanging preset stations

VOLUME

EDIT

SEARCH MODE CATEGORY

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

FM/AM

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

h

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO SELECT

TONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT ZONE CONTROL

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

OPTIMIZER MIC

ON/OFF ON/OFF

ON :OFF

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

BA

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT

PROGRAM

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

1,3

1,3

2,4

(U.S.A. model)

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

h

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

TUNED

MEMORY

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

E1:FM 87.5 MHz

TUNED

MEMORY

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

A5:FM 90.6 MHz

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

TUNED

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

EDIT E1-A5

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

50

XM Satellite Radio is the satellite radio service with

millions of listeners across the United States broadcasting

live daily. The XM Satellite Radio channel lineup includes

more than 130 digital channels of choice from coast to

coast: 68 commercial-free music channels, featuring hip

hop to opera, classical to country, bluegrass to blues; 33

channels of premier sports, talk, comedy, children’s and

entertainment programming; and more than 20 channels

of the traffic and weather information for major

metropolitan areas nationwide.

Because XM Satellite Radio is a subscription service, you

will need to set up an account and activate service with

XM using your XM Satellite Radio ID number. To check

your ID number, follow “Activating XM Satellite Radio”

on page 52. For further information on XM Satellite Radio

services, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at

“http://www.xmradio.com”.

■Information from XM Satellite Radio Inc.

Hardware and required basic monthly subscription sold

separately. Premium Channel available at additional

monthly cost. Installation costs and other fees and taxes,

including a one-time activation fee may apply.

Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and

programming subject to change. Subscriptions subject to

Customer Agreement available at xmradio.com. Only

available in the 48 continuous United States. © 2005 XM

Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. All other

trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Connect the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna

accessory (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear of

this unit. (For details, refer to the operating instructions

provided with the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna

accessory).

• For information on obtaining the XM Connect-and-Play digital

antenna accessory, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at

“http://www.xmradio.com” or consult your local retailer that

sells XM Ready products.

• To ensure the optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio

signals, the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory

must be placed at or near a southerly facing window with no

obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or

outdoors.

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

What is XM Satellite Radio? XM Satellite Radio connections

Notes

IN 1

IN 2

OUT

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

CD

CD DVD

COAXIAL

RS-232C

HDMI

DVR/

VCR 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

PR

MONITOR OUT

PBY

DVD

DTV

CBL/

SAT

XM

XM jack

(U.S.A. model)

51

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

This section describes the functions of each control used for XM Satellite Radio tuning.

The following controls are only available when XM is selected as the input source. Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set

AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select XM as the input source.

■Front panel functions

1SEARCH MODE

Switches between the All Channel Search, Category

Search, and Preset Search modes (see page 53).

2CATEGORY

(All Channel Search mode)

Changes the channel category to next one (while staying

in the All Channel Search mode).

(Category Search mode)

Changes the channel category to next one.

(Preset Search mode)

Switches between five preset groups (A to E).

3PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h

(All Channel Search mode)

Searches a radio channel within all channels. Press and

hold for quick search.

(Category Search mode)

Searches a radio channel within the selected category.

Press and hold for quick search.

(Preset Search mode)

Changes the preset channel number (1 to 8).

4MEMORY

Switches the unit to the preset memory mode.

5DISPLAY

Switches XM information such as channel number/name,

category or artist name/song title displayed in the front

panel display (see page 58).

■Remote control functions

1XM

Selects XM as the input source.

2Cursor buttons k / n / l / h

(All Channel Search mode)

Press A-E/CAT. l / h to change the channel category.

Press PRESET/CH k / n to search a radio channel within

all channels. Press and hold for quick search.

(Category Search mode)

Press A-E/CAT. l / h to change the channel category.

Press PRESET/CH k / n to search a radio channel within

the selected category. Press and hold for quick search.

(Preset Search mode)

Press A-E/CAT. l / h to change the preset group (A to

E).

Press PRESET/CH

k

/

n

to change the preset number (1 to 8).

3XM MEMORY

Switches the unit to the preset memory mode.

4SRCH MODE

Switches between the All Channel Search, Category

Search, and Preset Search modes (see page 53.).

5DISPLAY

Switches XM information such as channel number/name,

category or artist name/song title displayed in the front

panel display (see page 58).

6Numeric buttons

(All Channel Search or Category Search mode)

Use 1 to 9 and 0 to enter a channel number directly.

(Preset Search mode)

Use 1 to 8 to enter a preset channel number directly.

7ENT.

Confirms an entered channel number during the Direct

Number Access mode (see page 55).

XM Satellite Radio controls and functions

Note

EDIT

SEARCH MODE CATEGORY

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

FM/AM

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

hA/B/C/D/E

AUDIO SELECT

TONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT ZONE CONTROL

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT

PROGRAM

12345

(U.S.A. model)

MENU

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

BAND

SRCH MODE

NIGHT

AUDI O

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

12B

THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

90

+10

ENT.

5678

A

SPEAKERSMEMORY

MEMORY

PRESET/CH SET MENU

ON SCREEN

FREQ/TEXT EON STARTMODE PTY SEEK

STRAIGHT

2

3

4

5

6

7

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

AXM

1

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

(U.S.A. model)

52

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

To sign up for an account with the XM Satellite Radio

service, an XM Satellite Radio ID number is required.

Follow the procedure below to check your ID number, and

then access the website at “http://activate.xmradio.com/”

or call “1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)” with a

major credit card for signing up.

1Rotate the INPUT selector (or press XM on

the remote control) to select XM as the input

source.

The XM indicator lights up.

2Check the XM Satellite Radio reception level

and adjust the orientation of the XM Satellite

Radio antenna for a better percentage of the

reception level.

y

You can display the XM Satellite Radio reception level by

using the ANTENNA parameter in XM RADIO SET

(see page 86).

• If CHECK ANTENNA appears in the front panel display,

the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory may

not be connected to the XM jack on the rear of this unit

properly. See “XM Satellite Radio connections” on

page 50 and check the connection.

• The ANTENNA parameter cannot be adjusted by using

the remote control.

3Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) to

select channel 0.

You cannot select channel 0 if the All Channel Search mode

(see page 53) is not selected.

4Check the XM Satellite Radio ID number

displayed in the front panel display and write

it down.

ID:_____________________________________

Activating XM Satellite Radio

Notes

VOLUME

EDIT

SEARCH MODE CATEGORY

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

FM/AM

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

h

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO SELECT

TONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT ZONE CONTROL

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

OPTIMIZER MIC

ON/OFF ON/OFF

ON :OFF

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

BA

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT

PROGRAM

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

1

3

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

XM

or

Remote control

Front panel

AUTO

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

XM RADIO

Note

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

h

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Remote control

Front panel

or

53

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

Rotate the INPUT selector (or press XM on the

remote control) to select XM as the input source.

Information (such as channel number/name, category, or

artist name/song title) for the channel currently selected

appears in the front panel display and the XM indicator

lights up.

y

• Selecting the XM band automatically recalls the channel

previously selected.

• You can change the kind of channel information by pressing

DISPLAY repeatedly (see page 58).

The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the AUDIO

OUT (REC) jacks.

You can search for the channel you want to listen to using

one of three search modes. You can also enter the number

directly to select the desired channel. For details, see

“Direct Number Access mode” on page 55.

■All Channel Search mode

1Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio

mode” on page 53.

2Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on

the remote control) repeatedly to select ALL

CH SEARCH.

Selecting the XM Satellite Radio

mode

Note

VOLUME

EDIT

SEARCH MODE CATEGORY

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

FM/AM

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

h

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO SELECT

TONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT ZONE CONTROL

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

OPTIMIZER MIC

ON/OFF ON/OFF

ON :OFF

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

BA

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT

PROGRAM

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

or

Remote control

Front panel

XM

AUTO

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

[001] Preview

Using XM Satellite Radio search

modes

VOLUME

EDIT

SEARCH MODE CATEGORY

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

FM/AM

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

h

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO SELECT

TONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT ZONE CONTROL

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

OPTIMIZER MIC

ON/OFF ON/OFF

ON :OFF

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

BA

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT

PROGRAM

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

3

4

2

(U.S.A. model)

AUTO

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

ALL CH SEARCH0

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

MENU

SRCH MODE

or

Front panel Remote control

54

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

3To change the channel category, press

CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote

control) repeatedly.

4To search a channel within all channels,

press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control)

repeatedly.

y

You can search a channel with the quick search by pressing

and holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/

CH k / n on the remote control).

■Category Search mode

1Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio

mode” on page 53.

2Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on

the remote control) repeatedly to select CAT

SEARCH.

3To change the channel category, press

CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote

control) repeatedly.

4To search a channel within the selected

channel category, press PRESET/TUNING/CH

l / h (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote

control) repeatedly.

y

You can search a channel with the quick search by pressing

and holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/

CH k / n on the remote control).

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Front panel Remote control

or

Remote control

Front panel

or

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

h

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

VOLUME

EDIT

SEARCH MODE CATEGORY

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

FM/AM

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

h

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO SELECT

TONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT ZONE CONTROL

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

OPTIMIZER MIC

ON/OFF ON/OFF

ON :OFF

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

BA

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT

PROGRAM

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

3

4

2

(U.S.A. model)

AUTO

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

CAT SEARCH

or

Front panel Remote control

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

MENU

SRCH MODE

Front panel Remote control

or

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Remote control

Front panel

or

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

h

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

55

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

■Preset Search mode

Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

mode, you should preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For

details, see “Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels”

on page 56. All preset channels (A1 to E8) recalls 001

Preview by the factory setting.

1Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio

mode” on page 53.

2Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on

the remote control) repeatedly to select

PRESET SEARCH.

3To change the preset group (A to E), press

CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote

control) repeatedly.

4To change the preset number (1 to 8), press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH k

/ n on the remote control) repeatedly.

y

You can also select the preset number directly by pressing

the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control.

■Direct Number Access mode

1Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio

mode” on page 53.

2Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on

the remote control) repeatedly to select ALL

CH SEARCH or CAT SEARCH.

VOLUME

EDIT

SEARCH MODE CATEGORY

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

FM/AM

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

h

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO SELECT

TONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT ZONE CONTROL

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

OPTIMIZER MIC

ON/OFF ON/OFF

ON :OFF

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

BA

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT

PROGRAM

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

3

4

2

(U.S.A. model)

AUTO

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

PRESET SEARCH

or

Front panel Remote control

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

MENU

SRCH MODE

Front panel Remote control

or

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Remote control

Front panel

or

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

h

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

MENU

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

BAND

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

12B

THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

90

+10

ENT.

5678

A

SPEAKERSMEMORY

MEMORY

PRESET/CH SET MENU

ON-SCREEN

FREQ/TEXT EON STARTMODE PTY SEEK

STRAIGHT

2

4

3

XM MEMORY

(U.S.A. model)

or

Front panel Remote control

AUTO

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

ALL CH SEARCH0

AUTO

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

CAT SEARCH

or

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

MENU

SRCH MODE

56

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

3Press the numeric buttons to enter the

desired channel number.

For example, to enter the number 123, press the

numeric buttons as shown below.

The display changes as follows.

4If you enter fewer than three numbers, you

may press ENT. to tune to the channel

immediately or wait a few seconds to confirm

the entered channel number.

y

• If no button is pressed within a few seconds after entering

one-digit or two-digit number, the unit automatically

confirms the entered channel number.

• Pressing a button other than numeric buttons or ENT.

cancels the direct number access procedure.

You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite

Radio channels (eight preset numbers in five preset

groups, A1 to E8). You can then recall any preset channel

easily by selecting the preset group and number as

described in “Preset Search mode” on page 55.

1Search the XM Satellite Radio channel you

want to set as a preset channel.

To search the desired channel, carry out “All Channel

Search mode” on page 53, “Category Search mode”

on page 54, or “Direct Number Access mode” on

page 55.

2Press MEMORY on the front panel (or

XM MEMORY on the remote control) when

XM is selected as the input source.

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for about five seconds.

1

STEREO

2

MUSIC

3

ENTERTAIN

AUTO

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

<XM> -12

AUTO

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

<XM>123

AUTO

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

<XM> --1

ENT.

Setting XM Satellite Radio preset

channels

VOLUME

EDIT

SEARCH MODE CATEGORY

PRESET/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

FM/AM

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

h

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO SELECT

TONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT ZONE CONTROL

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

OPTIMIZER MIC

ON/OFF ON/OFF

ON :OFF

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

BA

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT

PROGRAM

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

3

4

2,5

(U.S.A. model)

AUTO

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

[040] Deep Tra

When the channel number 040 is selected

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MEMORY

Flashes

or

Front panel Remote control

RETURN

XM MEMORY

57

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

3While the MEMORY indicator is flashing,

press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the

remote control) to select a preset group

(A to E).

The group letter appears.

4While the MEMORY indicator is flashing,

press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) to

select a preset number (1 to 8).

5While the MEMORY indicator is flashing,

press MEMORY on the front panel (or XM

MEMORY on the remote control) to preset the

selected XM Satellite Radio channel.

A colon appears next to the preset number for

confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns off.

Presetting a new channel clears the former preset channel

stored in the same preset group and number.

AUTO MEMORY

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

C [040] Deep

Preset group

Front panel Remote control

or

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

AUTO MEMORY

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

C5 [040] Deep

Preset number

Remote control

Front panel

or

l

PRESET/TUNING/CH

h

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Note

AUTO

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

C5: [040] Deep

Colon appears

Front panel Remote control

or

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

RETURN

XM MEMORY

58

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

You can display XM information (such as channel

number/name, category, or artist name/song title) for the

channel currently selected in the OSD and in the front

panel display.

y

You can select the amount of time while the XM Satellite Radio

information is displayed in the OSD (see page 86).

If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel

display, see TROUBLESHOOTING on page 111.

■Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information in the OSD

Press DISPLAY on the front panel or on the

remote control.

The following screen is displayed in the OSD.

• To hold the XM Satellite Radio information screen, press

ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed in the

OSD.

• The XM Satellite Radio information screen on hold is released

if you press ENTER on the remote control again or if you

change the XM Satellite Radio channel.

• This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio information

screens for future reference. To view the previous two XM

Satellite Radio information screens, press TITLE on the remote

control repeatedly while the current XM Satellite Radio

information screen is being on hold.

■Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information in the front panel display

Press DISPLAY on the front panel or on the

remote control repeatedly to toggle between the

following XM information display modes.

When the channel number/name is displayed:

When the channel category is displayed:

When the artist name/song title is displayed:

y

• The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric

characters at once. If the information contains more than 14

characters, the information scrolls from right to left.

• If the information contains a character that cannot be

recognized by the unit, the character will be displayed with an

underbar “_”.

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information

Note

Notes

AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

DISPLAY

or

Front panel Remote control



XM INFORMATION

ALL CH SEARCH

XM : 012

CHAN : Deep Tracks

CAT : Rock

NAME : Led Zeppelin

TITLE : StairwayToHeaven

. ([012]Deep Tra)

[]/[]:CANCEL

[<]/[>]:CATEGORY

p

p

AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

DISPLAY

Channel name/number

Channel category

Artist name/Song title

or

Front panel

Remote control

AUTO

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

[040] Deep Tra

AUTO

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

<CAT>Rock

AUTO

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

Coldplay / Clo

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS

59

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live

instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of

the room. In addition to making the sound live, these

reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated,

and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting.

■Elements of a sound field

In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming

straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are

two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to

make up the sound field:

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms

– 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one

surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall.

Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one

surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so

numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

sonic afterglow. They are non-directional, and lessen the

clarity of the direct sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent

reverberation taken together help us to determine the

subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this

information that the digital sound field processor

reproduces in order to create sound fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and

subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you

would be able to create your own listening environment.

The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a

concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at

all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly

what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field

processor.

You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset

parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial

settings, you can change some of the parameters to better

suit the input source or your listening room.

1Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.

2Turn on the video monitor and press ON

SCREEN repeatedly to select the full display

mode.

y

For details on selecting the OSD mode, see page 87.

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS

What is a sound field? Changing parameter settings

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

VOLUME

+

–

POWER POWER POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

A

CH

+

–

TV VOL

+

–

AMP

SOURCE

TV

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

MENU

FREQ/RDSFREQ/RDS EONEON MODEMODE PTY SEEKPTY SEEK STARTSTART

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

NIGHT

AUDI O

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

1

2B

THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

90

+10

ENT.

5678

MACROONOFF

A

SPEAKERSMEMORY

XM

SET MENU

PRESET/CH

ON SCREEN

XM MEMORY

2

4,5

3

1

(U.S.A. model)

AMP

SOURCE

TV

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

60

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS

3Select the sound field program you want to

adjust.

4Press k / n to select the parameters.

5Press l / h to change the parameter value.

When you set a parameter to a value other than the

factory preset, an asterisk mark (*)

appears by the parameter name

on the video monitor.

6Repeat steps 3 through 5 as necessary to

change other program parameters.

• The available parameters may be displayed on more than one

OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages,

press k / n.

• You cannot change parameter values when MEMORY GUARD

is set to ON. If you want to change the parameter values, set

MEMORY GUARD to OFF (see page 84).

■Resetting parameters to the factory

values

To reset a certain parameter

Select the parameter you want to reset, then press l / h

repeatedly until the asterisk mark (*) next to the parameter

name disappears from the video monitor.

To reset all parameters

Use PARAM. INI (see page 85).

Notes

MUSIC

P.INIT.DLY;;21ms

P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0

S.INIT.DLY;;31ms

S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0

.

Pop/Rock

DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB

1

2B

THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

90

+10

ENT.

5678

A

SPEAKERSMEMORY

Sound field category

Parameters Parameter values

Cursor

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost. However, the stored data will be lost

in case the power cord is disconnected from the AC

wall outlet for more than one week.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

61

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from

almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field

processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.

Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous

concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters.

y

The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to

AUTO (see page 41) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.

• This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in

actual halls, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right.

• Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself.

You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked MULTI

can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked 2-CH can be used with 2-channel

(stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.

Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to

select sound field programs, see “Basic operations” on page 34.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

Notes

For movie/video sources

Source

Remote

control

button

Category

and

Program

Features

MULTI

2-CH

1STEREO

2ch Stereo

Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 (left and right) channels or plays back

2-channel sources as is.

3

ENTERTAINMENT

TV Sports

CINEMA DSP processing. Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow,

the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall.

This effect enhances the experience of watching various TV programs such as

news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs.

ENTERTAINMENT

Mono Movie

CINEMA DSP processing. This program is provided for reproducing monaural

video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum

reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence sound field.

ENTERTAINMENT

Game

CINEMA DSP processing. This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video

game sounds.

4

MOVIE THEATER

Spectacle

CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field

of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail,

making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any

kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS

(especially large-scale movie productions).

MOVIE THEATER

Sci-Fi

CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound

effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad

and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films

in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and

DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques.

MOVIE THEATER

Adventure

CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the

sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The

sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the

reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible.

MOVIE THEATER

General

CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm

and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive

sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all

around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations

without losing clarity.

62

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

MULTI

2-CH 5

THX

THX Cinema

THX processing for movie software.

THX

THX Game

THX processing for game software.

THX

THX Select2 Cinema

THX Select2 processing for movie software.

MULTI

6

STANDARD

DOLBY DIGITAL

Standard 5.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

STANDARD

q D+PL x Movie

Standard 7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

STANDARD

DOLBY D EX

Standard 6.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

STANDARD

DTS

Standard 5.1 channel processing for DTS sources.

STANDARD

DTS 96/24

Standard 5.1 channel processing for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources.

STANDARD

DTS+PL x Movie

Standard 7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic x) for DTS sources.

STANDARD

DTS+DOLBY EX

Standard 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.

STANDARD

DTS ES

Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete)

for DTS sources.

STANDARD

DTS 96/24 ES

Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete)

for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources.

STANDARD

Enhanced

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder.

2-CH

STANDARD

PRO LOGIC

Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.

STANDARD

PL x Movie

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software.

STANDARD

PL x Game

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for game software.

STANDARD

Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie software.

STANDARD

Enhanced

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder.

Source

Remote

control

button

Category

and

Program

Features

II

II

II

II

63

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.

Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to

select sound field programs, see “Basic operations” on page 34.

For music sources

Source

Remote

control

button

Category

and

Program

Features

MULTI

2-CH

1

STEREO

2ch Stereo

2 channel (left and right) playback.

STEREO

7ch Stereo

HiFi DSP processing. Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all

speakers. This provides a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at

parties, etc.

2

MUSIC

Hall in Vienna

HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately

1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which

produce a very full, rich sound.

MUSIC

The Bttm Line

HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line,

a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in

a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

MUSIC

The Roxy Thtr

HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data

for this program was recorded at LA’s hottest rock club. The listener’s virtual seat

is at the center-left of the hall.

MUSIC

Pop/Rock

CINEMA DSP processing. This program produces a vibrant atmosphere and lets

you feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert.

3

ENTERTAINMENT

Disco

HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively

disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is

also characterized by high-energy, immediate sound.

5THX

THX Music

THX processing for all 5.1 encoded music sources.

MULTI

6

STANDARD

q D+PL x Music

Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music sources.

STANDARD

DTS+PL x Music

Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music sources.

STANDARD

Enhanced

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder.

2-CH

STANDARD

PL x Music

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music software.

STANDARD

Neo:6 Music

DTS processing for music software.

II

II

II

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

64

You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your

listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.

■DSP LEVEL (DSP level)

Function: Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range.

Description: Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP

effect level relative to the level of the direct sound.

Control Range: –6 dB to +3 dB

■INIT. DLY / P. INIT. DLY (Initial delay)

Function: Changes the apparent distance the sound source is from the reflection face by adjusting the delay

between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.

Description: The smaller the value, the closer the reflection face seems to the sound source. The larger the value, the

farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value.

Control range: 1 to 99 ms

■ROOM SIZE / P. ROOM SIZE (Room size)

Function: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround

sound field becomes.

Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between

the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the

reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from

one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room.

Control range: 0.1 to 2.0

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

Source sound

Early

reflections

Time Time Time

INIT. DLY INIT. DLY INIT. DLY

Sound source

Reflection face

Level

Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms

Level

Level

Level

Level

Level

Time Time Time

Source sound

Early

reflections

Small value = 0.1 Large value = 2.0

Sound source

65

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

■LIVENESS (Liveness)

Function: Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections

decay.

Description: The early reflections of a source sound decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall

surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces

is referred to as dead, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as live.

The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the liveness of the

room.

Control range: 0 to 10

■S. INIT. DLY (Surround initial delay)

Function: Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound

field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround channels

are used.

Control range: 1 to 49 ms

■S. ROOM SIZE (Surround room size)

Function: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field.

Control range: 0.1 to 2.0

■S. LIVENESS (Surround liveness)

Function: Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field.

Control range: 0 to 10

■SB. INIT. DLY (Surround back initial delay)

Function: Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back sound field.

Control range: 1 to 49 ms

■SB. ROOM SIZE (Surround back room size)

Function: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field.

Control range: 0.1 to 2.0

■SB. LIVENESS (Surround back liveness)

Function: Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field.

Control range: 0 to 10

Source sound

Level

Level

Level

Dead

Live

Time Time Time

Small reflected

sound

Large reflected

sound

Small value = 0 Large value = 10

66

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

■REV. TIME (Reverberation time)

Function: Adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB

(at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range.

Description: The longer the reverberation time, the more live the listening room environment seems. The shorter the

reverberation time, the more dead the listening room environment seems.

Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s

■REV. LEVEL (Reverberation level)

Function: Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.

Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.

Control range: 0 to 100%

■REV. DELAY (Reverberation delay)

Function: Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the

reverberation sound.

Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you

feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment.

Control range: 0 to 250 ms

Reverberation Reverberation

60 dB 60 dB 60 dB

Source sound

REV.TIME REV.TIME REV.TIME

Sound source Short

reverberation

Long

reverberation

Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s

Early reflections

Source sound

Level

REV. LEVEL

Time

(dB)

60 dB

Level

Source sound

Reverberation

REV.TIME

REV.DELAY

Time

67

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

■DIALOG LIFT (Dialog lift)

Function: Adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front and center

channel elements to the presence speakers.

Description: The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound.

Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

For 7ch Stereo

Function: Adjusts the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode.

Control range: 0 to 100%

CT LEVEL (Center level)

SL LEVEL (Surround left level)

SR LEVEL(Surround right level)

SB LEVEL (Surround back level)

PL LEVEL (Presence left level)

PR LEVEL (Presence right level)

For PL x Music

PANORAMA (Panorama)

Function: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect.

Choices: OFF, ON

DIMENSION (Dimension)

Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear.

Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard)

CENTER WIDTH (Center width)

Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.

A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers.

Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only

from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3

For Neo:6 Music

CENTER IMAGE (Center image)

Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.

Control range: 0.0 to 1.0

68

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

■DECODE TYPE (Decoder type)

For MOVIE THEATER

Function: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using MOVIE THEATER programs.

Choices: Pro Logic / Pro Logic x / Neo:6

For THX Cinema

Function: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using THX Cinema.

Choices: Pro Logic / Pro Logic x / Neo:6

For SURROUND Standard

Function: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using SURROUND Standard.

Choices: Pro Logic / PL x Movie / PL x Music / PL x Game /

Neo:6 Cinema / Neo:6 Music

For SURROUND Enhanced

Function: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using SURROUND Enhanced.

Choices: Pro Logic / Pro Logic x / Neo:6

Pro Logic x appears when the surround back speakers are available, and Pro Logic appears when the surround back speakers are not

available.

Note

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS

69

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of audio signals being input. Refer to the following diagrams in the

table below to understand the speaker layout for each sound field program.

Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from speakers depending on the type of input source being played back.

Furthermore, there may be some channels that can only be used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of movies, such as

special sound effects, etc.

The abbreviations and symbols used in each diagram are as follows:

*1 When the q EX / q PL IIx / ES indicators are turned off

*2 When the q EX / q PL IIx / ES indicators are lit up and Priority is set to PRNS (see page 77)

*3 When the q EX / q PL IIx / ES indicators are lit up and Priority is set to SB (see page 77)

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS

Note

LFront left speaker PL Presence left speaker SR Surround right speaker

CCenter speaker PR Presence right speaker SBL Surround back left speaker

RFront right speaker SL Surround left speaker SBR Surround back right speaker

Speaker from which sound is being output Speaker from which no sound is being output

2-channel audio

(monaural)

2-channel audio

(stereo)

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *1

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *2

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *3

STEREO

2ch Stereo

STEREO

7ch Stereo

when surround back speakers are connected

when surround back speakers are not connected

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

70

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS

MUSIC

Hall in Vienna

The Bttm Line

The Roxy Thtr

ENTERTAINMENT

Disco

MUSIC

Pop/Rock

ENTERTAINMENT

Variety/Sports

Mono Movie

Game

THX

THX Cinema

THX Surround

EX

THX

THX Select2

Cinema

THX Music

THX

THX Game

STANDARD

DOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

DTS

PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC

MOVIE THEATER

Enhanced

DOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

DTS

PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC

2-channel audio

(monaural)

2-channel audio

(stereo)

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *1

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *2

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *3

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

71

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

STANDARD

PLIIx Movie

PLII Music

PLII Game

Movie/Game Movie/Music/Game

Music

MOVIE THEATER

Enhanced

PLII Movie

When Priority is set

to PRNS

When Priority is set

to SB

STANDARD

Neo:6 Cinema

Neo:6 Music

Cinema Cinema/Music

Music

2-channel audio

(monaural)

2-channel audio

(stereo)

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *1

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *2

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *3

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

72

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS

MOVIE THEATER

Enhanced

Neo:6 Cinema

When Priority is set

to PRNS

When Priority is set

to SB

STRAIGHT

Monaural playback

PURE DIRECT

Monaural playback

2-channel audio

(monaural)

2-channel audio

(stereo)

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *1

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *2

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *3

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

L

PL

C

R

PR

SL

SBRSBL

SR

MANUAL SETUP

73

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can use the following parameters in SET MENU to manually adjust a variety of system settings and customize the

way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your

listening environment.

y

• You can run MANUAL SETUP using the system menu that appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual uses the

OSD illustrations to explain the MANUAL SETUP procedure.

1 BASIC MENU

Use to manually adjust basic system parameters.

2 SOUND MENU

Use to manually adjust speaker settings or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or

projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU parameters are set automatically when you run AUTO SETUP (see page 30).

y

Most of the parameters described in SOUND MENU are set automatically when you run AUTO SETUP (see page 30). You can use

SOUND MENU to make further adjustments, but we recommend running AUTO SETUP first.

3 INPUT MENU

Use to manually reassign digital input and output, select the input mode, rename your input, or specify external input

settings.

MANUAL SETUP

Item Features Page

A)SPEAKER SET Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output and the cross over

frequency. 76

B)SP LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 78

C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 78

D)THX SET Adjusts the THX settings. 79

E)TEST TONE Turns the test tone output on or off for the SPEAKER SET, SP LEVEL and

SP DISTANCE settings. 79

Item Features Page

A)EQUALIZER Adjusts the tonal quality of each speaker. 79

B)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 80

C)DYNAMIC RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 80

D)AUDIO SET Adjusts the overall audio settings for this unit. 80

E)HDMI SET Adjusts the HDMI support audio. 80

Item Features Page

A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. 81

B)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the input. 82

C)VOLUME TRIM Adjusts the output volume of each jack. 82

D)DECODER MODE Selects the input mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the rear panel of

this unit. 82

E)MULTI CH SET Adjusts the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a

source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. 82

74

MANUAL SETUP

4 OPTION MENU

Use to manually adjust the optional system settings.

Item Features Page

A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the settings for the OSD and the front panel display and converts video signals. 83

B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings. 84

C)AUDIO SELECT Selects the type of input signal to be used. 84

D)DECODER MODE Selects whether to initialize the settings or to recall the previous settings for the input mode

selected in INPUT MENU. 84

E)PARAM. INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 85

F)ZONE SET Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals on the rear panel of

this unit. 85

G)XM RADIO SET Adjusts the XM Satellite Radio settings. 86

75

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter.

y

You can change the MANUAL SETUP parameters while the unit

is reproducing sound.

You cannot change some MANUAL SETUP parameters while

the unit is in either cinema or music night listening mode.

1Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press

SET MENU to enter SET MENU.

2Press n to select MANUAL SETUP and then

press ENTER to enter the selected category.

3Press k / n repeatedly to select a menu and

then press ENTER to enter the selected

menu item.

Repeat this operation to enter the setup mode of the

item you want to adjust.

4Press l / h repeatedly to change the setting

of the item you want to adjust.

5Press SET MENU (or press one of the sound

field program group buttons) to exit SET

MENU.

Using MANUAL SETUP

Note

MENU

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

B

THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOLUME

+

–

3421

90

+10

ENT.

5678

CH

+

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

+

–

AMP

SOURCE

TV

A

SPEAKERS

SET MENU

PRESET/CH

XM MEMORY

ON SCREEN

1,5

5

2-4

1

(U.S.A. model)

AMP

SOURCE

TV

SET MENU

MENU

SRCH MODE



SET MENU

;AUTO SETUP

. ;MANUAL SETUP

. ;INFORMATION

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

p

p

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost. However, the stored data will be lost

in case the power cord is disconnected from the AC

wall outlet for more than one week.

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

or

THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

5678

SET MENU

MENU

SRCH MODE

76

MANUAL SETUP

Use to manually adjust basic system parameters.

■Speaker set A)SPEAKER SET

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.

y

If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,

you can change these settings according to your preference.

Set any THX speakers to SML (small).

LFE/Bass out LFE/BASS OUT

Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the

subwoofer and/or the front left and right speakers

according to the characteristics of your system. This

setting also determines the routing of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS

sources.

Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), FRONT, BOTH

THX recommendation: SWFR

• Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and

low-frequency signals from other channels are directed

to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings.

• Select FRONT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and

low frequency signals from other channels are directed

to the front speakers according to the speaker settings

(even if you have previously set front speakers to

SMALL).

• Select BOTH if you connect a subwoofer and you want

to output low-frequency signals from front channels to

both the front speakers and subwoofer. LFE and low-

frequency signals from other channels are also directed

to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. Use

this function to reinforce low-frequency signals using

the subwoofer when playing back sources such as CDs.

Front speakers FRONT SP

Choices: SMALL, LARGE

• Select SMALL if you have small front speakers. The

unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front

channel to the speakers selected in LFE/BASS OUT.

• Select LARGE if you have large front speakers. The

unit directs the entire range of the front left and right

channel signals to the front left and right speakers.

Center speaker CENTER SP

Choices: NONE, SML, LRG

• Select NONE if you do not have a center speaker. The

unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front

left and right speakers.

• Select SML if you have a small center speaker. The

unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center

channel to the speakers selected in LFE/BASS OUT.

• Select LRG if you have a large center speaker. The unit

directs the entire range of the center channel signal to

the center speaker.

Surround L/R speakers SUR. L/R SP

Choices: NONE, SML, LRG

• Select NONE if you do not have surround speakers.

This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP

mode (see page 41) and automatically set SB L/R SP to

NONE.

• Select SML if you have small surround left and right

speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround

channel are directed to the speakers selected in LFE/

BASS OUT.

• Select LRG if you have large surround left and right

speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the

surround speakers. The entire range of the surround

channel signal is directed to the surround left and right

speakers.

Using BASIC MENU

Note

.A)SPEAKERSET

B)SPLEVEL

C)SPDISTANCE

D)THX SET



1 BASIC

MENU 1/2

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

p

p

.E)TEST TONE



1 BASIC

MENU 2/2

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

p

p

[SWFR FRONT BOTH

LFE/BASS OUT

[SMALL LARGE

FRONT SP

NONE [SML LRG

CENTER SP

NONE [SML LRG

SUR. L/R SP

77

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Surround back speakers SB L/R SP

Choices: LRGx2, LRGx1, SMLx2, SMLx1, NONE

• Select LRGx2 if you have 2 large surround back

speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the

surround back channel signal to the surround back

speakers.

• Select LRGx1 if you have a large surround back

speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the

surround back channel signal to the left surround back

speaker.

• Select SMLx2 if you have 2 small surround back

speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround

back channels are directed to the speakers selected in

LFE/BASS OUT.

• Select SMLx1 if you have a small surround back

speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround

back channel are directed to the speakers selected in

LFE/BASS OUT, and the rest of the frequency signals

are directed to the left surround back speaker.

• Select NONE if you do not have a surround back

speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back

channel signal to the surround left and right speakers.

• If you select LRGx1 or SMLx1, connect the speaker to the left

SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.

• NONE is automatically selected if BI-AMP is set to ON

(see page 89). This affects settings for SP LEVEL and SP

DISTANCE.

Presence speakers PRESENCE SP

Use this feature if you want to use the presence speakers

connected to this unit.

Choices: NONE, YES

• Select NONE if you do not have presence speakers.

• Select YES if you have presence speakers and want to

use them.

Bass cross over CROSS OVER

Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency

for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the

selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer.

Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,

120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz

THX recommendation: 80Hz

Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE

If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to

adjust the frequency phase characteristics of your

subwoofer.

Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE

• Select NORMAL not to reverse the phase of your

subwoofer.

• Select REVERSE to reverse the phase of your

subwoofer.

Priority PRIORITY

Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound

simultaneously. You can select to prioritize either speaker

set when playing sources that contain surround back

channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound field

programs.

Choices: PRNS, SB

• Select PRNS to use presence speakers even when

surround back channel signals are input. The signals

for the surround back channel will be output from

surround speakers.

• Select SB to use surround back speakers when a

surround back channel signal is detected in a CINEMA

DSP program. Presence channel signals will be output

from front speakers.

Notes

SMLx1 [SMLx2

SB L/R SP

[NONE YES

PRESENCE SP

FREQ;;;80Hz(THX)

CROSS OVER

[NORMAL REVERSE

SUBWOOFER PHASE

PRNS [SB

PRIORITY

78

MANUAL SETUP

■Speaker level B)SP LEVEL

Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels

between the front left (or surround left) speaker and each

speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 76).

Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

•FR. L adjusts the balance of the front left speaker.

•FR. R adjusts the balance of the front right speaker.

•CENT. adjusts the balance of the center speaker.

•SUR. L adjusts the balance of the surround left

speaker.

•SUR. R adjusts the balance of the surround right

speaker.

•SB L adjusts the balance of the surround back left

speaker.

•SB R adjusts the balance of the surround back right

speaker.

•SB adjusts the balance of the surround back speakers.

•SWFR adjusts the balance of the subwoofer.

•PR. L adjusts the balance of the presence left speaker.

•PR. R adjusts the balance of the presence right

speaker.

y

If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point

upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the

meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each

speaker to 75 dB.

• CENT. cannot be adjusted if CENTER SP is set to NONE (see

page 76).

• SUR. L and SUR. R cannot be adjusted if SB L/R SP is set to

NONE (see page 77).

• SB L and SB R can be adjusted only if SB L/R SP is set to

either LRGx2 or SMLx2 (see page 77).

• SB can be adjusted only if SB L/R SP is set to either LRGx1 or

SMLx1 (see page 77).

• SWFR cannot be adjusted if LFE/BASS OUT is set to FRONT

(see page 76).

• PR. L and PR. R cannot be adjusted if PRESENCE SP is set to

NONE (see page 77).

■Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE

Use this feature to manually input the distance of each

speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel.

Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the

main listening position. However, this is not possible in

most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay

must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all

sounds arrive at the listening position at the same time.

Unit UNIT

Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)

• Select meters to input speaker distances in meters.

• Select feet to input speaker distances in feet.

Speaker distances

Choices: 0.3 to 24.0 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)

Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

•FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker.

•FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right

speaker.

•CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker.

•SUR. L adjusts the distance of the surround left

speaker.

•SUR. R adjusts the distance of the surround right

speaker.

•SB L adjusts the distance of the surround back left

speaker.

•SB R adjusts the distance of the surround back right

speaker.

•SB adjusts the distance of the surround back speakers.

•SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer.

•PRNS L adjusts the distance of the presence left

speaker.

•PRNS R adjusts the distance of the presence right

speaker.

• CENTER cannot be adjusted if CENTER SP is set to NONE

(see page 76).

• SUR. L and SUR. R cannot be adjusted if SB L/R SP is set to

NONE (see page 77).

• SB L and SB R can be adjusted only if SB L/R SP is set to

either LRGx2 or SMLx2 (see page 77).

• SB can be adjusted only if SB L/R SP is set to either LRGx1 or

SMLx1 (see page 77).

• SWFR cannot be adjusted if LFE/BASS OUT is set to FRONT

(see page 76).

• PRNS L and PRNS R cannot be adjusted if PRESENCE SP is

set to NONE (see page 77).

Notes

-+

.FR.L

FR.R

CENT.

B)SP

LEVEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

p

p

Notes

.UNIT;;;;;;;;feet

FRONTL;;;10.0ft

FRONTR;;;10.0ft

CENTER;;;;10.0ft

C)SP

DISTANCE

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

p

p

79

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■THX set D)THX SET

Use to manually adjust the THX settings.

Surround back speaker distance SB DIST.

Use this feature to optimize the surround sound field when

you have to place the surround back L/R speakers apart.

Choices: under 0.3m, 0.3 – 1.2m, over 1.2m

(under 1ft, 1 – 4ft, over 4ft)

• Select under 0.3m (under 1ft) if the distance between

the surround back L/R speakers is less than 0.3 m (1 ft).

• Select 0.3 – 1.2m (1 – 4ft) if the distance between the

surround back L/R speakers is between 0.3 and 1.2 m

(between 1 and 4 ft).

• Select over 1.2m (over 4ft) if the distance between the

surround back L/R speakers is more than 1.2 m (4 ft).

■Test tone E)TEST TONE

Turns the test tone output on or off for the SPEAKER

SET, SP LEVEL and SP DISTANCE settings.

Choices: ON, OFF

y

If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arm’s length and point

upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the

meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each

speaker to 75 dB.

• This function is automatically turned off if you exit BASIC

MENU.

• If you select ON and enter the SPEAKER SET, SP LEVEL or

SP DISTANCE menu, the test tone is output from the selected

speakers.

Use to manually adjust speaker settings or compensate for

video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors

or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU parameters are

set automatically when you run AUTO SETUP (see

page 30).

■Graphic equalizer A)EQUALIZER

Use this feature to select parametric (PEQ) or graphic

equalizer (GEQ).

Equalizer select SELECT

Choices: AUTO PEQ, GEQ, EQ OFF

• Select AUTO PEQ to use the equalizer adjusted in

AUTO SETUP (see page 30).

• Select GEQ to adjust the built-in 7-band graphic

equalizer.

• Select EQ OFF to completely deactivate both PEQ and

GEQ.

• If GEQ is selected, the OSD automatically changes to the

graphic equalizer screen as shown below.

• AUTO PEQ is automatically selected if you run AUTO SETUP

(see page 30).

Graphic equalizer GEQ

Use to match the tonal quality of the center, surround L/R

and surround back L/R, surround back and presence L/R

speakers with that of the front L/R speakers.

Choices: –6 to +6 (dB)

You can adjust 7 frequency bands: 63Hz, 160Hz, 400Hz,

1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz, 16kHz

The GEQ parameter can be adjusted only if GEQ is selected in

SELECT.

Notes

[<]/[>]:Adjust

SB DIST.

0.3-1.2m

D)THX SET

[<]/[>]:Select

TEST TONE;;;;OFF

E)TEST TONE

Using SOUND MENU

Notes

Note

.A)EQUALIZER

B)LFE LEVEL

C)DYNAMIC RANGE

D)AUDIO SET



2 SOUND

MENU 1/2

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

p

p

.E)HDMI SET



2 SOUND

MENU 2/2

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

p

p

.SELECT....GEQ

A)EQUALIZER

[<]/[>]:Adjust

[ENTER]:Enter

.CHANNEL;;FRONT L

-+

63Hz 0.0dB

160Hz 0.0dB

400Hz 0.0dB

A)EQUALIZER

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

p

p

80

MANUAL SETUP

Test tone TEST

Turns the test tone output on or off to compare the tonal

quality of the center, surround L/R, surround back L/R,

surround back and presence L/R speakers with that of the

front L/R speakers.

Choices: ON, OFF

■Low-frequency effect level

B)LFE LEVEL

Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency

effect) channel according to the capacity of your

subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-

frequency special effects which are only added to certain

scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit

decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

Choices: –20 to 0 (dB)

Speaker LFE level SPEAKER

Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.

Headphone LFE level HEADPHONE

Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.

Depending on the settings of LFE LEVEL, some signals may not

be output from the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack.

■Dynamic range C)DYNAMIC RANGE

Use to select the amount of dynamic range to be applied to

your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only

when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.

Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard),

MAX (maximum)

Speaker SP

Select to adjust the dynamic range of speakers.

Headphone HP

Select to adjust the dynamic range of headphones.

• Select MIN if you regularly listen at low volume levels.

• Select STD for general use.

• Select MAX to preserve the greatest amount of

dynamic range.

■Audio set D)AUDIO SET

Use to customize the overall audio settings for this unit.

Muting type MUTE TYPE

Use to adjust how much the muting function reduces the

sound output.

Choices: FULL, –20 dB

• Select FULL to completely halt all output of sound.

• Select –20 dB to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.

Audio Delay A.DELAY

Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the

video image. This may be necessary when using certain

LCD monitors or projectors.

Choices: 0 to 240 (ms)

Tone bypass TONE BYPASS

Use to automatically bypass the tone control when BASS

and TREBLE are set to 0 dB.

Choices: AUTO, OFF

• Select AUTO to automatically bypass the tone control

when BASS and TREBLE are set to 0 dB.

• Select OFF not to bypass the tone control at any time.

■HDMI set E)HDMI SET

Use to adjust the HDMI support audio.

Support audio SUPPORT AUDIO

Use to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on

this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the

HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit.

Choices: HTR-5990, OTHER

• Select HTR-5990 to play back HDMI audio signals on

this unit. The HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI

IN jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI

component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the

rear panel of this unit.

• Select OTHER to play back HDMI audio signals on

another HDMI component.

The HDMI video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2

jack of this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT jack of this

unit.

Note

.SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB

HEADPHONE;;;;0dB

B)LFE LEVEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

p

p

.SP: MIN STD[MAX

HP: MIN STD[MAX

C)DYNAMIC RANGE

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

p

p

Note

.MUTE TYPE;;;FULL

A.DELAY;;;;;;0ms

TONE BYPASS;AUTO

LE>E

D)AUDIO SET

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

p

p

[<]/[>]:Adjust

SUPPORT AUDIO:

HTR-5990

E)HDMI SET

81

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode

or rename your inputs.

■Input/output assignment

A)I/O ASSIGNMENT

You can assign jacks according to the component to be

used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your

needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the

respective jacks and effectively connect more components.

Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the

corresponding component by using the INPUT selector on

the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote

control.

The default settings are displayed with parentheses in the OSD.

Component video input CMPNT-V INPUT

Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2,

V-AU X

Coaxial input COAXIAL IN

Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV,

CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX

• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same

type of jack.

• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and

OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the

COAXIAL jack.

Optical input OPTICAL IN

Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV,

CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2

Optical output OPTICAL OUT

Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV,

CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX

HDMI input HDMI IN

Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2,

V-AU X

Using INPUT MENU

Note

Notes

.A)I/OASSIGNMENT

B)INPUT RENAME

C)VOLUME TRIM

D)DECODER MODE

3 INPUT

MENU 1/2

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

p

p

.E)MULTI CH SET

3 INPUT

MENU 2/2

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

p

p

.[A];;;;; DVD

( DVD )

[B];;;;; DTV

( DTV )

[C];;;;;CBL/SAT

(CBL/SAT)

CMPNT-V INPUT



.(1);;;;; CD

(CD)

(2);;;;; DVD

( DVD )

(3);;;;;DVR/VCR2

(DVR/VCR2)

COAXIAL IN



.(4);;;;; CD

(CD)

(5);;;;; DVD

( DVD )

(6);;;;; DTV

( DTV )

OPTICAL IN 1/2



.(8);;;;;MD/TAPE

(MD/TAPE)

(9);;;;; CD-R

( CD-R )

OPTICAL OUT

.IN1;;;;; DVD

( DVD )

IN2;;;;;CBL/SAT

(CBL/SAT)

HDMI IN

82

MANUAL SETUP

■Input rename B)INPUT RENAME

Use this feature to change the name of the inputs in the

OSD and front panel display.

1Press an input selector button to select the

input you want to change the name of.

2Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.

3Press l / h to place the _ (under-bar) under

the space or the character you want to edit.

4Press k / n to select the character you want

to use and l / h to move to the next one.

• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.

• Press n to change the character in the following

order, or press k to go in the reverse order:

A to Z, space, 0 to 9, space, a to z, space, #, *, +,

etc.

5Repeat steps 1 through 4 to rename each

input.

6Press ENTER or RETURN on the remote

control to exit from the INPUT RENAME

menu.

■Volume trim C)VOLUME TRIM

Use to adjust the level of the signal input at each jack. This

is useful if you want to balance the level of each input

source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching

between input sources.

Choices: -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

You can only adjust the volume for the current input source using

this setting.

■Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE

Use to switch the input mode. You can designate the

reassigned digital input jacks for specific audio signals

(DTS, etc.).

Choices: AUTO, DTS

• Select AUTO if you want this unit to automatically

detect input signal types and select the appropriate

input mode.

• Select DTS if you want this unit to select DTS as the

input mode.

■Multi CH Setup E)MULTI CH SET

Use to set the direction of the signals input into the center,

subwoofer and surround channels when a source

component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

If you input 8-channel signals from an external decoder,

use this feature to select jacks for the additional front

signals.

INPUT CH

Use this setting to select the number of channels input

from an external decoder.

Choices: 6CH, 8CH

• Select 6CH if you input 6-channel signals.

• Select 8CH if you input 8-channel signals.

If ZONE2 AMP is set to SUR, PRNS or BOTH (see page 85), no

sound is output from the surround back speakers even if you

select 8CH. In this case, select 6CH and set the output setting of

the external component to 6 channels.

FRONT

If you selected 8ch in INPUT CH, you can select analog

jacks at which front signals from an external decoder will

be input.

Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT,

VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX

Note

DVD -> DVD

B)INPUT RENAME

[<]/[>]:Position

[]/[]:Chara.

p

p

C)VOLUME TRIM

.PHONO 0.0dB

CD 0.0dB

CD-R 0.0dB

MD/TAPE 0.0dB

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

p

p

Note

D)DECODER MODE

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

p

p

.CD ;;;;AUTO

DVD ;;;;AUTO

DTV ;;;;AUTO

CBL/SAT ;;;;AUTO

.INPUT CH;;;;;6CH

FRONT;;;;;;;;DVD

E)MULTI CH SET

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

p

p

83

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Use to manually adjust the optional system settings.

■Display set A)DISPLAY SET

Use this feature to adjust the display settings.

The parameter settings for DISPLAY SET (except for the

DIMMER setting) can be initialized to the factory presets. Use

the V-RESET feature in the ADVANCED SETUP menu (see

page 89).

Dimmer DIMMER

Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.

Choices: –4 to 0

OSD shift OSD SHIFT

Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.

Choices: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward)

Initial setting: 0

•Press h to lower the position of the OSD.

•Press l to raise the position of the OSD.

Gray back GRAY BACK

Choices: AUTO, OFF

• Select AUTO to display a gray background in the OSD

when there is no video signal being input.

• Select OFF not to display a gray background even

when there is no video signal being input.

Video conversion V CONV.

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the component

interlace/progressive conversion as well as the HDMI

interlace/progressive up-conversion of the analog video

signals input at the composite video, S-video and

component video jacks.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select ON to activate the component interlace/

progressive conversion as well as the HDMI interlace/

progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals.

• Select OFF to deactivate the component interlace/

progressive conversion as well as the HDMI interlace/

progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals.

y

When using the THX system, we recommend setting V CONV. to

OFF.

• The OSD is not displayed when V CONV. is set to OFF.

• Even when V CONV. is set to ON, HDMI digital signals are not

converted to analog video signals.

• If V CONV. is set to OFF, the CMPNT I/P and HDMI I/P

features are deactivated.

• Converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT

jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video

connections (composite or S-video) between each component.

• When converting composite video or S-video signals from a

VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer

depending on your VCR.

• Unconventional signals input at the composite video, S-video or

component video jacks cannot be converted even if V CONV. is

set to ON.

• If unconventional signals are being input at the composite

video, S-video or component video jacks, the video output may

be abnormal as a result. In such cases, set V CONV. to OFF.

Component interlace/progressive conversion

CMPNT I/P

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the analog I/P

conversion of the analog video signals input at the

composite video, S-video and component video jacks so

that the analog video signals deinterlaced from 480i to

480p are output at the MONITOR OUT jacks.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select ON to activate the analog I/P conversion of the

analog video signals.

• Select OFF to deactivate the analog I/P conversion of

the analog video signals.

• This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the

OSD if V CONV. is set to OFF.

• If your video monitor does not support the analog video signals

with 480p of resolution, the SET MENU items may not be

displayed on your video monitor when CMPNT I/P is set to

ON.

Using OPTION MENU

Note

.A)DISPLAYSET

B)MEMORY GUARD

C)AUDIO SELECT

D)DECODER MODE

4

OPTION

MENU 1/2

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

p

p

.E)PARAM. INI

F)ZONE SET

G)XM RADIO SET

4

OPTION

MENU 2/2

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

p

p

.DIMMER;;;;;;;0

OSD SHIFT;;;;0

GRAY BACK;AUTO

V CONV.;;;;;ON

A)DISPLAY SET

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

p

p

Notes

Notes

84

MANUAL SETUP

HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion

HDMI I/P

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the HDMI I/P up-

conversion of the analog video signals input at the

composite video, S-video and component video jacks so

that the analog video signals deinterlaced from 480i to

480p are output at the HDMI OUT jack.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select ON to activate the HDMI I/P up-conversion of

the analog video signals.

• Select OFF to deactivate the HDMI I/P up-conversion

of the analog video signals.

• This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the

OSD if V CONV. is set to OFF.

• When the analog video signals with 1080i or 720p of resolution

are up-converted to HDMI and output at the HDMI OUT jack,

the picture quality may worsen.

■Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP

program parameter values and other system settings.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select ON to protect the following system parameters.

– DSP program parameters

– All SET MENU items except MEMORY GUARD

– All speaker levels

– The on-screen display (OSD) mode

• Select OFF to deactivate the memory guard feature.

• When MEMORY GUARD is set to ON, you cannot use the test

tone or select any other SET MENU items.

• When MEMORY GUARD is set to ON, “MEMORY

GUARD!” appears in the OSD and in the front panel display

when you try to adjust the protected system parameters.

■Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT

Use this feature to designate the default input mode for the

input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks

when you turn on the power of this unit.

Choices: AUTO, LAST

• Select AUTO if you want this unit to automatically

detect the type of input signals and select the

appropriate input mode.

• Select LAST if you want this unit to automatically

select the last input mode used for the connected input

source.

Selecting LAST does not recall the last setting for the EXTD

SUR. button.

■Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE

Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for

the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks

when you turn on the power of this unit. See page 41 for

details about the input mode.

Choices: AUTO, LAST

• Select AUTO to if you want this unit to automatically

detect the type of input signals and select the

appropriate decoder mode.

• Select LAST to if you want this unit to automatically

select the last decoder mode used for the connected

input source.

Selecting LAST does not recall the last setting for the EXTD

SUR. button.

Notes

Notes

[ON OFF

B)MEMORY GUARD

[<]/[>]:Adjust

Note

Note

[AUTO LAST

C)AUDIO SELECT

[<]/[>]:Adjust



[AUTO LAST

D)DECODER MODE

[<]/[>]:Adjust



85

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■Parameter initialization E)PARAM. INI

Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound

field program within a sound field program group. When

you initialize a sound field program group, all of the

parameter values within that group revert to their initial

settings.

Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound field

program that you want to initialize.

An asterisk (*) next to a program name means that the

parameter values have been changed from their initial

settings.

• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter

settings once you initialize a sound field program group.

• You cannot separately initialize individual sound field

programs.

• You cannot initialize any program groups when MEMORY

GUARD is set to ON.

■Zone set F)ZONE SET

Speakers B SP B

Use to specify the location of speakers connected the

SPEAKERS B terminals.

Choices: MAIN, ZONE B

• Select MAIN to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when

the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals

are set in the main room.

• Select ZONE B if the speakers connected to the

SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If

SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is

turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in

the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound

from SPEAKERS B only.

• If you select ZONE B and connect headphones to the PHONES

jack on the unit, the sound is output from both headphones and

SPEAKERS B.

• When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters

the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.

Zone 2 volume ZONE2 VOL

Use to select how the volume control will operate with

regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks.

Choices: VAR, FIX

• Select VAR to adjust the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume

simultaneously with VOLUME +/– on the remote

control.

• Select FIX to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume level

to a standard line level.

Zone 3 volume ZONE3 VOL

Use to select how the volume control will operate with

regard to the ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks.

Choices: VAR, FIX

• Select VAR to adjust the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume

simultaneously with VOLUME +/– on the remote

control.

• Select FIX to fix the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume level

to a standard line level.

Zone 2 amplifier ZONE2 AMP

Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers are amplified.

Choices: EXT, SUR, PRNS, BOTH

• Select EXT if you want to connect your Zone 2

speakers through an external amplifier connected to the

ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit.

• Select SUR to use the internal surround amplifier of

this unit if you want to connect your Zone 2 speakers

directly to the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker

terminals on the rear panel of this unit.

• Select PRNS to use the internal surround back

amplifier of this unit if you want to connect your Zone

2 speakers directly to the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3)

speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit.

• Select BOTH to use the internal surround and surround

back amplifiers of this unit if you want to connect your

Zone 2 speakers directly to both the PRESENCE/

ZONE 2(3) and the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) speaker

terminals on the rear panel of this unit.

• If BI-AMP is set to ON in the ADVANCED SETUP menu,

SUR, PRNS and BOTH cannot be selected.

• Zone 2 and Zone 3 cannot use the same amplifier at the same

time. If BOTH is selected for ZONE2 AMP, for instance, only

EXT can be selected for ZONE3 AMP and vice versa.

• The Intelligent Power AMP Assign feature of this unit becomes

in effect in the following cases so that the surround and

surround back amplifiers of this unit are automatically assigned

to the main room for the use of the surround back speakers

connected to the SURROUND BACK speaker terminals in the

7.1-channel system.

– When ZONE2 AMP and ZONE3 AMP are set to PRNS and

EXT respectively and Zone 2 is turned off

– When ZONE2 AMP and ZONE3 AMP are set to EXT and

PRNS respectively and Zone 3 is turned off

• If either ZONE2 AMP or ZONE3 AMP is set to SUR or PRNS,

the speaker system of the main room is limited to 3.1 or

2.1-channel playback no matter when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is

turned off because the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) speaker

terminals are used for the zone connection.

Notes

Notes

STEREO

MUSIC

ENTERTAINMENT

MOVIE THEATER

*SURROUND

PRESS DSP KEY

E)PARAM. INI

SP B;;;;;;;;MAIN

ZONE2 VOL;;;;VAR

ZONE3 VOL;;;;VAR

ZONE2 AMP;;;;EXT

F)ZONE SET

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

p

p

Notes

86

MANUAL SETUP

Zone 3 amplifier ZONE3 AMP

Use to select how the ZONE 3 speakers will be amplified.

Choices: EXT, SUR, PRNS, BOTH

• Select EXT if you want to connect your Zone 3

speakers through an external amplifier connected to the

ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit.

• Select SUR to use the internal surround amplifier of

this unit if you want to connect your Zone 3 speakers

directly to the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker

terminals on the rear panel of this unit.

• Select PRNS to use the internal surround back

amplifier of this unit if you want to connect your Zone

3 speakers directly to the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3)

speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit.

• Select BOTH to use the internal surround and surround

back amplifiers of this unit if you want to connect your

Zone 3 speakers directly to both the PRESENCE/

ZONE 2(3) and the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) speaker

terminals on the rear panel of this unit.

• If BI-AMP is set to ON in the ADVANCED SETUP menu,

SUR, PRNS and BOTH cannot be selected.

• Zone 2 and Zone 3 cannot use the same amplifier at the same

time. If BOTH is selected for ZONE2 AMP, for instance, only

EXT can be selected for ZONE3 AMP and vice versa.

• The Intelligent Power AMP Assign feature of this unit becomes

in effect in the following cases so that the surround and

surround back amplifiers of this unit are automatically assigned

to the main room for the use of the surround back speakers

connected to the SURROUND BACK speaker terminals in the

7.1-channel system.

– When ZONE2 AMP and ZONE3 AMP are set to PRNS and

EXT respectively and Zone 2 is turned off

– When ZONE2 AMP and ZONE3 AMP are set to EXT and

PRNS respectively and Zone 3 is turned off

• If either ZONE2 AMP or ZONE3 AMP is set to SUR or PRNS,

the speaker system of the main room is limited to 3.1 or

2.1-channel playback no matter when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is

turned off because the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) speaker

terminals are used for the zone connection.

■XM Satellite Radio set G)XM RADIO SET

Use this feature to adjust the XM Satellite Radio settings.

Display DISPLAY

Use this feature if you want to display the XM Satellite

Radio information in the OSD for a certain amount of

time.

Choices: ON, 10S, 30S, OFF

• Select ON to display the XM Satellite Radio

information in the OSD.

• Select 10S to set the amount of time for the XM

Satellite Radio information to be displayed for 10

seconds.

• Select 30S to set the amount of time for the XM

Satellite Radio information to be displayed for 30

seconds.

• Select OFF not to display the XM Satellite Radio

information in the OSD.

Antenna ANTENNA

Use this feature if you want to display the XM Satellite

Radio reception level.

Display status: NONE, 0 to 100%

• If the displayed percentage of the reception level is

below the average (approximately 60%), you need to

adjust the orientation of the XM Satellite Radio

antenna for a better percentage of the reception level.

• If NONE is displayed, the XM Satellite Radio antenna

may not be firmly connected to the XM jack on the rear

panel of this unit. Check the XM Satellite Radio

connection.

The ANTENNA parameter cannot be adjusted by using the

remote control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of the

XM Satellite Radio antenna for a better percentage of the

reception level.

Notes

Note

.XM DISPLAY;;;10S

XM ANTENNA;;NONE

G)XM RADIO SET

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

p

p

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

87

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can switch between the available OSD modes and manually adjust the output level of each speaker.

You can display the operating information of this unit on a

video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and sound

field program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much

easier to see the available options and parameters than it is

to read the information in the front panel display.

Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit

and then press ON SCREEN on the remote

control repeatedly to change the OSD mode.

The OSD mode changes in the following order:

Full display → Short display → Display off

Full display

Fully shows the sound field program parameter settings as

well as the contents of the front panel display.

Short display

Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display at the

bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit.

Display off

Only the operations performed using ON SCREEN on the

remote control are displayed. However, the OSD is

displayed when using SET MENU or the test tone feature

even if the OSD mode is turned off.

• The OSD signal is not output at the OUT (REC) jack and will

not be recorded.

• You can display a gray background in the OSD when there is no

video signal being input by setting GRAY BACK to AUTO

(see page 83).

• The OSD is not displayed in the following cases:

– When video signals in the progressive format or HDTV video

signals are being input.

– When the signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack

are being output at the HDMI OUT jack.

– When V CONV. is set to OFF (see page 83).

You can manually adjust the output level of each speaker

while listening to a music source. This is also possible

when playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks.

This operation will override the level adjustments made in AUTO

SETUP (see page 30) and SP LEVEL (see page 78).

1Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.

2Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the

speaker you want to adjust.

FRONT L adjusts the front left speaker level.

CENTER adjusts the center speaker level.

FRONT R adjusts the front right speaker level.

SUR.R adjusts the surround right speaker level.

SB R adjusts the surround back right speaker level.

SB L adjusts the surround back left speaker level.

SUR.L adjusts the surround left speaker level.

SWFR adjusts the subwoofer level.

PRNS L adjusts the presence left speaker level.

PRNS R adjusts the presence right speaker level.

3Press l / h to adjust the speaker output

level.

Control range: +10 dB to –10 dB

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Selecting the OSD mode

Notes

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

Full display

Short display

Display off

MUSIC

P.INIT.DLY;;21ms

P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0

S.INIT.DLY;;31ms

S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0

.

Pop/Rock

DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB

MUSIC

Pop/Rock

Full display Short display

Adjusting speaker levels

Note

MENU

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

NIGHT

AUDI O

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

VOLUME

+

–

CH

+

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

+

–

AMP

SOURCE

TV

SET MENU

PRESET/CH

XM MEMORY

ON SCREEN

1

3

2

(U.S.A. model)

AMP

SOURCE

TV

BAND

LEVEL

TITLE

ADVANCED SETUP

88

This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The ADVANCED SETUP menu offers

additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold

under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.

1Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to

release it outward to the OFF position to set

this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby

mode.

2Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the

front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF

inward to the ON position to turn on the

power of this unit.

3Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front

panel to select the parameter you want to

adjust.

The name of the selected parameter appears in the

front panel display.

See pages 88 and 89 for a complete list of available

parameters.

4Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front

panel repeatedly to change the setting.

5Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to

release it outward to the OFF position to save

the new setting and set this unit, Zone 2 and

Zone 3 to the standby mode.

y

The new setting is activated next time you press

MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on the

power of this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3.

• The control buttons on the remote control and VOLUME as

well as the other control buttons on the front panel except

MASTER ON/OFF, STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and the

PROGRAM selector are ineffective while you are using the

ADVANCED SETUP menu.

• Zone 2, Zone 3 and the speaker relay are all turned off and all

audio and video output is muted while you are using the

ADVANCED SETUP menu.

• The ADVANCED SETUP menu is only available in the front

panel display.

■Speaker impedance SP IMP.

Use to set the impedance of this unit so that it matches that

of your speakers.

Choices: 6ΩMIN, 8ΩMIN

• Select 6ΩMIN for speakers with 6 ohms or higher.

• Select 8ΩMIN for speakers with 8 ohms or higher.

■User preset PRESET

Use to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial

factory settings with the exception of System Memory and

AUTO SETUP settings.

Choices: CANCEL, RESET

• Select CANCEL if you do not want to reset the

parameters of this unit.

• Select RESET to reset the parameters of this unit.

• This setting does not affect the ADVANCED SETUP menu

item parameters.

• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on

the power of this unit.

ADVANCED SETUP

Using ADVANCED SETUP

MASTER

ON OFF

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

MASTER

ON OFF

PROGRAM

SP IMP.-8 MIN

ADVANCED SETUP

Current settingName of the selected parameter

Notes

Notes

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

MASTER

ON OFF

89

ADVANCED SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■Remote sensor REMOTE SEN

Use to activate or deactivate the signal-receiving

capability of the remote control sensor on the front panel

of this unit.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select ON if you want to activate the signal-receiving

capability of the remote control sensor.

• Select OFF if you want to deactivate the signal-

receiving capability of the remote control sensor.

We recommend setting this parameter to ON in most cases.

■Wake on RS-232C access WAKE ON 232C

Use to set this unit to transmit data via the RS-232C

interface when this unit is in the standby mode.

Choices: Y (yes), N (no)

• Select Y set this unit to transmit data via the RS-232C

interface.

• Select N set this unit not to transmit data via the

RS-232C interface.

■Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP

Use to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote control

recognition (see page 93).

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select ID1 when the remote control AMP library code

is set to 2001.

• Select ID2 when the remote control AMP library code

is set to 2002.

You need to set the corresponding remote control code for the

remote control.

■Remote control tuner ID REMOTE TUN

Use to set the tuner ID of this unit for remote control

recognition (see page 93).

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select ID1 when the remote control tuner library code

is set to 2602.

• Select ID2 when the remote control tuner library code

is set to 2603.

You need to set the corresponding remote control code for the

remote control.

■Remote control XM ID REMOTE XM

Use to switch the XM-related remote control codes

between ID1 and ID2.

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select ID1 when the remote control XM library code is

set to 2604.

• Select ID2 when the remote control XM library code is

set to 2605.

You need to set the corresponding remote control code for the

remote control.

■Fan operation mode FAN MODE

Use to set the operation of the cooling fan of this unit.

Choices: AUTO, CONT.

• Select AUTO to set the fan to operate automatically

according to the temperature of this unit.

• Select CONT. to set the fan to operate continuously

regardless of the temperature of this unit.

■Bi-AMP BI-AMP

Use to activate or deactivate the bi-AMP function.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select ON if you want to activate the bi-AMP function.

• Select OFF if you want to deactivate the bi-AMP

function.

When BI-AMP is set to ON, the SURROUND BACK terminals

cannot be used to connect surround back speakers in that the

SURROUND BACK terminals are already used for the bi-AMP

connection (see page 17).

■Video reset V-RESET

Use to initialize the parameter settings for DISPLAY SET

in OPTION MENU (see page 83). This feature is useful if

the SET MENU items are not displayed on your video

monitor due to a technical error between the CMPNT I/P

setting and the capability of your video monitor. That is, if

your video monitor does not support the analog video

signals with 480p of resolution, the SET MENU items

may not be displayed on your video monitor when

CMPNT I/P is set to ON (see page 83).

Choices: YES, CANCEL

The parameter setting for DIMMER is not initialized (see

page 83).

Note

Note

Note

Note

Note

Note

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

90

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audio and video components made by

YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control these other components, you must set up the remote control with the

appropriate remote control codes. This remote control also has a learn feature which allows the remote to acquire

functions from other remote controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter.

■Controlling this unit

The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit

after setting AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP to activate the

AMP mode.

■Controlling other components

The shaded areas below can be used to control other

components. Each button has a different function

depending on the selected components. Select the

component you want to control by pressing an input

selector button or SELECT k / n. The name of the

selected component appears in the display window.

■Controlling optional components (OPTN area)

OPTN is an additional component control area that can be programmed with remote control functions independently

from any input source. This area is useful for programming commands that are to be used only as a part of a macro

function or for components that do not have a valid remote control code.

To select the OPTN control area, press n repeatedly until OPTN appears in the display window.

You cannot set a remote control code for this area. See page 94 to program buttons operated within this component control area.

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Control area

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

MENU

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DV D

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

12B

THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOLUME

+

–

3421

90

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

A

CH

+

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

+

–

AMP

SOURCE

TV

MACROONOFF

A

SPEAKERSMEMORY

XM

PRESET/CH

ON SCREEN

XM MEMORY

SET MENU

The buttons inside

the dotted lines

control this unit in

any mode (POWER,

STANDBY,

SLEEP, AUDIO

SEL, the input

selector buttons,

VOLUME +/–,

MUTE,

STRAIGHT

(EFFECT) and

PURE DIRECT).

AMP/SOURCE/

TV

Set to AMP to

operate this unit.

Display

window

(U.S.A. model)

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

EXIT

MENU

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

PRG SELECT

A/B/C/D/E

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TOP

TITLE

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DV D

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

12B

THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR

STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOL

+

–

3421

90

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

A

B

CH

+

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

+

–

AMP

SOURCE

TV

MACROONOFF

A

SPEAKERSMEMORY

PRESET

MENU

FREQ/RDS

FREQ/RDS

EON

EON

MODE

MODE

PTY SEEK

PTY SEEK

START

START

REC

DISC SKIP

RETURN

DISPLAY

BAND

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

NIGHT

AUDIO

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

12B

THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

90

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER

AV

TV

CH

+

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

+

–

A

SPEAKERSMEMORY

ON SCREEN

PRESET/CH

XM MEMORY

SET MENU

Component

control area

You can control up

to 14 different

components by

setting appropriate

remote control

codes (see page 92).

The A and input

selector buttons

switch the function

of the component

control area below.

* Use the A buttons

to control other

components

regardless of whether

they are connected to

this unit.

Factory setting:

A...Tape deck

Display

window

AMP/

SOURCE/

TV

Set to

SOURCE to

operate the

component

selected with

an input

selector

button.

Set to TV to

operate the

television

(you must set

the remote

control code

in DTV or

PHONO).

SELECT k / n

switches control to

another component

without changing

the input source on

this unit.

(U.S.A. model)

Note

91

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Once you set the appropriate remote control codes, you

can use this remote to control your other components.

Note that some buttons may not correctly operate the

selected component. Use the input selector buttons to

select the component you want to operate. The remote

control automatically switches to the appropriate control

mode for that component.

*1 This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button.

*2 These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the remote control code is set in DTV or PHONO.

When the remote control code for your TV is set up in both the DTV and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV area.

*3 These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the remote control code is set in VCR 1.

Controlling each component

FREQ/RDSFREQ/RDS EONEON MODEMODE PTY SEEKPTY SEEK STARTSTART

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

MENU

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

NIGHT

AUDI O

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

1

2B

THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOL

+

–

3421

90

+10

ENT.

5678

CH

+

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

+

–

SOURCE

TV

MACROONOFF

A

SPEAKERSMEMORY

MENU

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

SRCH MODE

A/B/C/D/E

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DV D

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOLUME

+

–

POWER POWER POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

A

CH

+

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

+

–

AMP

SOURCE

TV

XM

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

ON SCREEN

XM MEMORY

1

2

3

5

4

0

A

B

6

7

8

9

(U.S.A. model)

DVD player/

DVD recorder VCR Cable TV/

Satellite tuner TV LD player CD player MD recorder/

CD recorder Tape deck Tuner

1AV P OW E R Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 VCR power *3 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1

2TV POWER TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 Power *1 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2

3TV VOL + TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 Volume + TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2

TV VOL – TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 Volume – TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2

CH +

TV channel +

*2

Channel + Channel + Channel + TV channel +

*2

TV channel +

*2

TV channel +

*2

TV channel +

*2

TV channel +

*2

CH –

TV channel –

*2

Channel – Channel – Channel – TV channel –

*2

TV channel –

*2

TV channel –

*2

TV channel –

*2

TV channel –

*2

TV INPUT TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 Input TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2

TV MUTE TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2 Mute TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2

4TITLE Title Title Title Title Band

5MENU Menu Menu Menu

6ENTER Menu enter Menu select Menu select

kMenu up Menu up Menu up Preset up

(1 to 8)

nMenu down Menu down Menu down Preset down

(1 to 8)

lMenu left Menu left Menu left Preset down

(A to E)

hMenu right Menu right Menu right Direction A/B Preset up

(A to E)

7RETURN Return Return Return Return

81-9, 0, +10

Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons

9ll Search

backward

Search

backward

VCR search

backward *3

VCR search

backward *3

Search

backward

Search

backward

Search

backward

Search

backward

hh Search forward Search forward VCR search

forward *3

VCR search

forward *3 Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward

bSkip backward Chapter/Skip

backward Skip backward Skip backward Direction back

aSkip forward Chapter/Skip

forward Skip forward Skip forward Direction

forward

REC/

DISC SKIP

Disc skip (player)

Rec (recorder)

Rec VCR rec *3 VCR rec *3 Disc skip Rec Rec

sStop Stop VCR stop *3 VCR stop *3 Stop Stop Stop Stop

ePause Pause VCR pause *3 VCR pause *3 Pause Pause Pause Pause

hPlay Play VCR play *3 VCR play *3 Play Play Play Play

0AUDIO Audio Audio

ADISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Display

BENTER Enter Enter/recall Enter/

numeric button

92

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for

each input area. For a complete list of available remote

control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL

CODES” at the end of this manual.

The following table shows the default component

(Library: component category) and the remote control

code for each input area.

Remote Control Code Default Settings

You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even

if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above.

In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code.

1Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.

2Press an input selector button to select the

source component you want to set up.

3Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds

using a ballpoint pen or similar object.

The library name (ex. L;DVD) and the selected

component name (ex. DVD) appear alternately in the

display window.

y

If you want to setup for another component, press the input

selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component.

• Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds,

otherwise the learning process will start.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.

4If you want to change a library (component

category), press l / h. You can set a

different type of component.

Library choices: L;DVD, L;DVR, L;LD, L;CD,

L;CDR, L;MD, L;TAP (tape), L;TUN (tuner),

L;AMP, L;TV, L;CAB (cable), L;SAT (satellite),

L;VCR

• The tuner library (L;TUN) code is preset in the TUNER

and XM buttons in order to operate this unit. The initial

settings for the TUNER and XM buttons are 2602 and

2604 respectively. However, you can switch the tuner

library code by entering one of the following codes if

necessary.

• The AMP library (L;AMP) code is preset to 2001 in order

to operate this unit. However, you can switch the AMP

library code by entering one of the following codes if

necessary.

Setting remote control codes

Input area

Library

(component

category)

Default YAMAHA

code

ATAPE2700

XM TUNER 2604

PHONO TV –

TUNER TUNER 2602

CD CD 2300

MULTI CH

INPUT DVD 2102

V-AUX VCR –

CBL/SAT CABLE –

MD/TAPE MD 2500

CD-R CD-R 2400

DTV TV –

VCR 1 VCR –

DVR/VCR2 DVR 2807

DVD DVD 2102

Note

AMP

SOURCE

TV

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

AXM

Notes

Notes

LEARN

93

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Setting remote control AMP codes

Select one of the following codes to set the remote control

AMP code for the component you want to use.

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE and then

change the remote control code settings.

• You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP ID

(see page 89).

• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you

may be able to operate the other components

simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,

set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit

separately.

Setting remote control tuner codes

Select one of the following codes to set the remote control

tuner code for the component you want to use.

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and press TUNER

on the remote control to select TUNER as the input source

and then change the remote control code settings.

• You need to set the corresponding remote control tuner ID

(see page 89).

• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you

may be able to operate the other components

simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,

set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit

separately.

Setting remote control XM codes

Select one of the following codes to set the remote control

XM code for the component you want to use.

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and press XM on the

remote control to select XM as the input source and then

change the remote control code settings.

• You need to set the corresponding remote control XM ID

(see page 89).

• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you

may be able to operate the other components

simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,

set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit

separately.

5Press ENTER.

The four-digit code set for the selected component

appears in the display window.

0000 appears in the display window if no code has been set.

6Press the numeric buttons to enter the

four-digit remote control code for the

component you want to use.

For a complete list of available remote control codes,

refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at

the end of this manual.

7Press ENTER to set the number.

OK appears in the display window if setting was

successful.

NG appears in the display window if the setting was

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.

y

If you continuously want to set up another code for another

component, press the input selector button or

SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat steps 4

through 6.

AMP library

code

(remote

control

setting)

Function

Remote

control

AMP ID

(this unit’s

setting:

see page 89)

2001

(initial setting)

To operate this unit using

the default code.

To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3

features (see page 102).

ID1

(initial setting)

2002

To operate this unit using an

alternative code.

To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3

features (see page 102).

ID2

Notes

Tuner

library code

(remote

control

setting)

Function

Remote

control

tuner ID

(this unit’s

setting:

see page 89)

2602

(initial setting)

To operate this unit using

the default code.

ID1

(initial setting)

2603 To operate this unit using an

alternative code. ID2

Notes

XM library

code

(remote

control

setting)

Function

Remote

control XM

ID

(this unit’s

setting:

see page 89)

2604

(initial setting)

To operate this unit using

the default code.

ID1

(initial setting)

2605 To operate this unit using an

alternative code. ID2

Notes

Note

1

2B

THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

90

+10

ENT.

5678

A

SPEAKERSMEMORY

94

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

8Press LEARN again to exit from the setup

mode.

9Press one of the buttons shaded below to

see if you can control your component. If you

can, the remote control code is correct.

y

If the manufacturer of your component has more than one

code, try each of them until you find the correct one.

• ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not

indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than

one button simultaneously.

• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes

for commercially available audio and video components

(including YAMAHA components). If operation is not possible

with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote

control function using the Learn feature (see “Using LEARN”)

or use the remote control supplied with the component.

• Function programmed using the learn feature take priority over

remote control code functions.

You can program remote control codes from other remote

controls. Use the LEARN feature if you want to program

functions not included in the basic operations covered by

the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control

code is not available. You can program any of the buttons

available in the component control area (see page 90). The

buttons can be programmed independently for each

component.

This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote

control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most

of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some

special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the

operating instructions for the other remote control.)

1Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.

2Press an input selector button to select a

source component.

3Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm

(2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control

on a flat surface so that their infrared

transmitters are aimed at each other.

Notes

LEARN

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

A

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

FREQ/RDS

FREQ/RDS

EON

EON

MODE

MODE

PTY SEEK

PTY SEEK

START

START

REC

DISC SKIP

MACROONOFF

XM

(U.S.A. model)

Using LEARN

Note

AMP

SOURCE

TV

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

AXM

(U.S.A. model)

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

AXM

5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)

(U.S.A. model)

95

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

4Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar

object.

LEARN and the selected component name (ex. DVD)

appear alternately in the display window.

• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for

more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control

code setting mode.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.

5Press the button for which you want to

program the new function.

LEARN appears in the display window.

6Press and hold the button you want to

program on the other remote control until OK

appears in the display window.

NG appears in the display window if learning was

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 5.

y

• If you want to program another function, repeat steps 5

and 6.

• If you continuously want to program another function for

another component, press SELECT k / n to select the

component, then repeat steps 5 and 6.

7Press LEARN again to exit the learning

mode.

• ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not

indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than

one button simultaneously.

• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions.

However, depending on the signals learned, FULL may appear

in the display before you program 200 functions. In this case,

clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for

further learning.

• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:

– When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other

components are weak.

– When the distance between the two remote controls is too

great or too small.

– When the remote control infrared windows are not facing each

other at the appropriate angle.

– When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.

– When the function to be programmed is continuous or

uncommon.

Notes

LEARN

MENU

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

NIGHT

AUDI O

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

VOLUME

+

–

POWER POWER POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

A

CH

+

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

+

–

AMP

SOURCE

TV

XM

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

ON SCREEN

XM MEMORY

(U.S.A. model)

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

AXM

(U.S.A. model)

Notes

LEARN

96

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

You can change the name of the input source that appears

in the display window on the remote control if you want to

use a different name than the factory preset. This is useful

when you have set the input selector to control a different

component.

1Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.

2Press an input selector button to select the

source component you want to rename.

The selected component name appears in the display

window.

3Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled.

In this case, press RE-NAME again.

4Press k / n to select and enter a character.

Pressing n changes the character as follows:

A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon),

/ (slash), and space.

(Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order.)

5Press l / h to move the cursor to the next

position.

6Press ENTER to set the new name.

OK appears in the display window if renaming was

successful.

NG appears in the display window if renaming was

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.

y

If you continuously want to rename another component,

press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select

the component, then repeat steps 4 through 6.

7Press RE-NAME again to exit the renaming

mode.

ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not

indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one

button simultaneously.

Using RE-NAME

Note

AMP

SOURCE

TV

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

AXM

(U.S.A. model)

RE-NAME

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Note

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

RE-NAME

97

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

The MACRO feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example,

when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button

to start playback. The MACRO feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button.

The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros

(see page 98).

*1 You can turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC

OUTLETS on the rear panel of this unit. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component.

For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.)

*2 When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either DTV or PHONO (see page 92), you can turn on the power of your TV

without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for DTV takes priority over the one for PHONO.

*3 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode.

*4 Playback can be started for any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD

recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the control area of that

component (see page 94) or set a remote control code (see page 92).

Using MACRO

Macro buttons First Second Third

——

—

———

———

(*1)

—

—

(CD area) (*4)

—

—

—

(MD/TAPE area) (*4)

(CD-R area) (*4)

—

(VCR 1 area) (*4)

(DVR/VCR 2 area) (*4)

(DVD area) (*4)

CD POWER CD

(CD area)

Press a macro button To automatically transmit these signals in order

STANDBY STANDBY

POWER POWER

(*1)

POWER

TV

(*2)

A

XM

PHONO

POWER

PHONO

TUNER TUNER

(*3)

CD CD

MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN

V-AUX V-AUX

CBL/SAT CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE MD/TAPE

CD-R CD-R

DTV DTV

VCR 1 VCR 1

DVR/VCR2 DVR/VCR2

DVD DVD

98

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

■MACRO operations

1Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON.

2Press a macro button.

• When you have finished using the MACRO feature, set

MACRO ON/OFF to OFF.

• While the remote is carrying out a MACRO program, it will not

accept any other button’s function until the macro operation is

complete (the transmission indicator stops flashing).

• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro

is operating until the macro operation is complete.

■Programming MACRO operations

You can program your own macro and use the MACRO

feature to transmit several remote control commands in

sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote

control codes or perform learning operations before

programming the macro. We do not recommend

programming continuous operations such as volume

control in a macro.

• The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is

programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again

when the programmed macro is cleared.

• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default

macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents.

1Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.

2Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“MCR ?” appears in the display window.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the macro programming mode will be

automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again.

3Press the macro button you want to use to

operate the macro.

The macro button name (ex. M;DVD) and the

selected component name (ex. DVD) appear

alternately in the display window.

AGAIN appears in the display window if you press a button

other than a macro button.

Notes

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

FREQ/RDS

FREQ/RDS

EON

EON

MODE

MODE

PTY SEEK

PTY SEEK

START

START

REC

DISC SKIP

MACROONOFF

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

AXM

MACROMACRO ON/OFF

Macro buttons

(U.S.A. model)

Notes

Note

Note

AMP

SOURCE

TV

MACRO

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

AXM

(U.S.A. model)

99

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

4Press the buttons for the functions you want

to include in the macro operation in

sequence.

You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you

have set 10 steps, FULL appears and the remote

control automatically exits the macro mode.

To change the selected source component, press

SELECT k / n. Pressing the input selector buttons will

program a macro step, whereas SELECT k / n only changes

the selected component and corresponding component control

area.

5Press MACRO again when the operation

sequence you want to program is complete.

ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button

not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than

one button simultaneously.

You can clear all changes made in each function set, such

as learned functions, macros, renamed source names and

setup remote control codes.

■Basic CLEAR operations

1Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.

2Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

CLEAR appears in the display window.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled.

In this case, press CLEAR again.

3Press k / n to select the clear mode.

L;CD Clears all learned functions in the respective

component control area. Press an input selector

button to select the component.

L;AMP Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control

area.

L;ALL Clears all learned functions.

M;ALL Clears all programmed macros.

RNAME Clears all renamed source names.

FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote

to the factory settings.

The name of a component is shown after a semicolon (;).

4Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3

seconds.

WAIT appears in the display window. If clearing was

successful, C;OK appears in the display window.

y

Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the

button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer

setting, if you have set remote control codes).

L;ALL and FCTRY may take about 30 seconds to complete.

Note

Note

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost. However, the stored data will be lost

in case the power cord is disconnected from the AC

wall outlet for more than one week.

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

AXM

1

2

3

Indicates the

number of macro

steps entered

Flashes alternately so you can

set the next step

MCR 1: DVD

MCR 2: AV POWER

MCR 3: AUDIO SEL

(U.S.A. model)

Using CLEAR

Note

Note

Note

AMP

SOURCE

TV

CLEAR

CLEAR

100

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

5Release the object used to press CLEAR to

exit from the clearing mode.

• C;NG appears in the display window if clearing was

unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 3.

• ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not

indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one

button simultaneously.

■Clearing a learned function

You can clear the function learned for a certain button in

each control area.

1Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.

2Press an input selector button to select the

source component containing the function

you want to clear.

The selected component name appears in the display

window.

3Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar

object.

LEARN and the selected component name

(ex. DVD) appear alternately in the display window.

• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for

more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote

control code setting mode.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.

4Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen

or similar object and then press the button

you want to clear for about 3 seconds.

C;OK appears in the display window if clearing was

successful.

y

• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat

step 4.

• If you continuously want to clear another function for

another component, press SELECT k / n to select the

component, then repeat step 4.

• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the

factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have

set remote control codes).

5Release the object used to press CLEAR to

exit the clearing mode.

The remote control returns to the learning mode.

6Press LEARN again to exit.

• C;NG appears in the display window if clearing was

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.

• ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not

indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one

button simultaneously.

Notes

Notes

CLEAR

AMP

SOURCE

TV

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

AXM

(U.S.A. model)

LEARN

Notes

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

FREQ/RDS

FREQ/RDS

EON

EON

MODE

MODE

PTY SEEK

PTY SEEK

START

START

REC

DISC SKIP

MACROONOFF

(U.S.A. model)

101

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■Clearing a macro function

You can clear the function programmed for a certain

macro button.

1Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.

2Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“MCR ?” appears in the display window.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the macro programming mode will be

automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again.

3Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen

or similar object, then press the macro

button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.

C;OK appears in the display window if clearing was

successful.

y

• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat

step 3.

• Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts

to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you

have set remote control codes).

4Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode.

The remote control returns to the macro

programming mode.

5Press MACRO again to exit.

• C;NG appears in the display window if clearing was

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.

• ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not

indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one

button simultaneously.

Note

Notes

AMP

SOURCE

TV

MACRO

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

REC

DISC SKIP

MACROONOFF

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

(U.S.A. model)

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

102

This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 features enable you to set this unit

to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can control

this unit from the second or third room using the supplied remote control.

You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit:

• An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room.

• An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second

and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example).

• An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room.

y

• You do not need an extra amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room if you want to use the internal amplifiers of this unit.

• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room configuration, we recommend that you consult with

your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2 and Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements.

• Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the CONTROL OUT jack on this unit. If you own these products, you may not

need to use an infrared emitter. Up to six YAMAHA components can be connected as shown.

■Using the external amplifiers

To use an external amplifier in Zone 2, select EXT in ZONE2 AMP (see page 85).

• When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the

amplifier in the second/third room.

• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.

• The REMOTE IN jack can be used for either Zone 2 or Zone 3 but cannot be used for both Zone 2 and Zone 3 at the same time.

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third

room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit.

Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components

Notes

OUTOUT IN

REMOTE

IN

REMOTE

OUT IN

REMOTE REMOTE

This unit YAMAHA

component

YAMAHA

component

Infrared signal

receiver

REMOTE OUT

VIDEO IN

AUDIO IN

MONITOR OUT

SP OUT

REMOTE IN

ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT

ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT

REMOTE IN

MAIN

ZONE 3

ZONE 2

Infrared emitter

DVD player

(or other component)

Amplifier

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Amplifier

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Second room Third roomMain room

SYSTEM

This unit

103

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■Using the internal amplifiers of this unit

If you want to use one internal amplifier (surround or surround back) of this unit

Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) or PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker

terminals and select either SUR or PRNS for ZONE2 AMP or ZONE3 AMP (see pages 85 and 86).

If you want to use two internal amplifiers (both surround and surround back) of this unit

Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) and PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker

terminals and select BOTH for ZONE2 AMP or ZONE3 AMP (see pages 85 and 86).

You can select the zone you want to control by using the

control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control.

Once the zone you want to control is selected, you can

control the selected zone as described in “Controlling

Zone 2 and Zone 3” on page 104.

■Front panel operations

1Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, ZONE 2 ON/OFF

or ZONE 3 ON/OFF on the front panel to

individually turn on this unit, Zone 2 or Zone

3.

Press each button repeatedly to turn on the respective

zone or set it to the standby mode.

y

Once MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed

inward to the ON position, you can also press POWER and

STANDBY on the remote control to turn on this unit, Zone

2 and Zone 3 simultaneously.

2Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel

repeatedly to select the zone you want to

control.

Each time you press ZONE CONTROL, the front

panel display changes as shown below, and the

indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for

approximately 5 seconds. However, no indicator

flashes when this unit is selected.

ZONE2

Controls the Zone 2 component connected to the

ZONE 2 AUDIO L/R jacks on the rear panel of this

unit.

ZONE3

Controls the Zone 3 component connected to the

ZONE 3 AUDIO L/R jacks on the rear panel of this

unit.

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE

SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) or PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a

Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker per channel.

Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low

impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.

Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This

information is found on the back panel of your Receiver.

RL

+

–

PRESENCE/ ZONE 2(3)

SINGLE

RL

+

–

+

–

+

+

–

–

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND/ZONE 2(3)

RL

Second room

This unit

Third room

Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3

ON/OFF ON/OFF

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROL

ZONE2 ZONE3

No indicator flashes when this unit is selected.

104

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

y

• You must complete this step within 5 seconds while the

selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise,

the currently selected zone mode is automatically

canceled. In this case, press ZONE CONTROL again.

• The initial setting is ZONE2 when both Zone 2 and Zone 3

are turned on.

3Proceed to “Controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3”

on page 104 for detailed information on the

Zone 2 and Zone 3 control functions.

■Remote control operations

1Set AMP/SOURCE/TV on the remote control

to AMP.

2Press SELECT k repeatedly to select the

zone you want to control.

ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 is displayed in the display

window.

3Proceed to “Controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3”

for detailed information on the Zone 2 and

Zone 3 control functions.

4Press SELECT k / n to exit from the

Zone 2/Zone 3 mode.

• The input source of Zone 2 and the source available for

recording are always the same.

• ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 appears in the display window only

when k is pressed, and ALL appears only when n is

pressed.

Once the zone you want to control is selected as described

in “Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3” on page 103, you can

control Zone 2 and Zone 3 by using the control buttons on

the front panel or on the remote control. The available

operations are listed as follows:

• Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3

• Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3

• Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3

• Tuning into FM or AM when TUNER is selected as the

input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3

• Tuning into the XM Satellite Radio when XM is

selected as the input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3

■Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Use the INPUT selector on the front panel (or

press one of the input selector buttons on the

remote control) to select the input source of the

selected zone.

If the remote control is used to select the input source, “2:

name of the selected input source” or “3: name of the

selected input source” is displayed in the display window

when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected respectively.

• Select TUNER as the input source to use the TUNER

features in the selected zone. For details about the

TUNER operations, see “FM/AM TUNING” on

page 44.

• Select XM as the input source to use the XM Satellite

Radio features in the selected zone. For details about

the XM Satellite Radio operations, see “XM

SATELLITE RADIO TUNING” on page 50.

The selected input source is shared across all zones.

y

You must complete this step within 5 seconds while the selected

zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently

selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press

ZONE CONTROL on the front panel again.

Notes

AMP

SOURCE

TV

SELECT

or

Controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3

Note

INPUT

or

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

AXM

(U.S.A. model)

105

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press VOLUME

+/– on the remote control) to adjust the volume level of the

selected zone.

Control range: –80 dB to +16.5 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

VOLUME +/– can be used only when ZONE2 VOL or ZONE3

VOL is set to VAR in ZONE SET (see page 85).

y

Press MUTE to mute the sound output to the selected zone.

■Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Press CH +/– and TV VOL +/– on the remote control to

adjust the high-frequency response (TREBLE) and the

low-frequency response (BASS) respectively.

Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB

Control step: 2 dB

Check that “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display

window of the remote control before you adjust the tonal quality

of the corresponding zone (see page 104).

y

You can also adjust the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using

TONE CONTROL on the front panel. For details, see “Adjusting

the tonal quality” on page 36.

POWER and STANDBY on the remote control work

differently depending on the selected zone that appears in

the display window.

• When the normal, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is selected,

you can turn on this unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3 or set them

to the standby mode individually.

• When the all mode is selected, pressing POWER turns

on this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 simultaneously and

pressing STANDBY sets them to the standby mode

simultaneously.

In the normal mode, MAIN appears for a few seconds when

POWER or STANDBY is pressed.

Note

Note

VOLUME

+

–

VOLUME

or

TV VOL

+

–

CH

+

–

Using the control mode of Zone 2

and Zone 3

Control mode LCD display

POWER

and

STANDBY

Normal mode Name of component

Turns on the main

unit only or sets it to

the standby mode.

Zone 2 mode

“ZONE 2” or “2:name

of the selected

component”

Turns on Zone 2 or

sets it to the standby

mode.

Zone 3 mode

“ZONE 3” or “3:name

of the selected

component”

Turns on Zone 3 or

sets it to the standby

mode.

All mode “ALL”

POWER: turns on

the main unit, Zone 2

and Zone 3.

STANDBY: sets the

main unit, Zone 2

and Zone 3 to the

standby mode.

Note

HDMI

106

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first

industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital A/V (audio/

video) interface.

Providing an interface between any A/V source (such as a

set-top box or A/V receiver) and an audio/video monitor

(such as a digital television – DTV), HDMI supports

standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as

multi-channel digital audio using a single cable.

HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports

8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to

accommodate future enhancements and requirements.

When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth

Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure

audio/video interface that meets the security requirements

of content providers and system operators.

For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website

at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.

• Analog audio signals input at the audio input jacks other than

the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack cannot be output at the

HDMI OUT jack. However, analog video signals input at the

composite video, S-video and component video jacks can be

up-converted to HDMI so that the digitally up-converted video

signals can be output at the HDMI OUT jack (see page 84).

• Connect the HDMI OUT jack of other components (such as a

DVD player) to the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit.

Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN 1 or

HDMI IN 2 jack of other components (such as a projector).

• You need a commercially available HDMI cable to connect this

unit to other HDMI components. Use an HDMI cable shorter

than 5 m (15 ft) to ensure stable operations and to prevent losses

of video quality.

• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or

DVI components.

• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect

this unit to other DVI components.

• Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2

jack cannot be output from analog video output jacks.

• Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1 or

HDMI IN 2 of this unit cannot be digitally output at the

HDMI OUT jack.

• This unit is not compatible with multi-stereo area audio signals

of Super Audio CDs. You can connect devices (such as a DVD

player) to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

• When connected to a DVD player, audio signals may not be

output depending on the type of the DVD player. In case the

DVD player connected to this unit does not output DVD multi-

channel audio signals at the HDMI OUT jack, connect the DVD

player to the analog multi-channel audio input jacks.

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio plays back, video and

audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the

DVD player.

• Video and audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2

jack cannot be output at the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is

set to the standby mode or the power is turned off.

• When connecting other HDMI components to this unit, refer to

the instruction manuals for those components.

• When HDMI audio signals are output from components like a

DVD player, the audio signal format (such as sampling

frequencies) may be restricted depending on the HDMI video

signal format.

• Do not disconnect or connect the HDMI cable from this unit or

turn off the power of the HDMI/DVI components connected to

the HDMI OUT jack of this unit while data is being transferred.

Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise.

■HDMI compatibility with this unit

HDMI

What is HDMI?

This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following

standards:

• HDMI 1.1 (High-Definition Multimedia Interface

Specification Version 1.1) licensed by HDMI

Licensing, LLC.

• HDCP 1.1 (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection System Revision 1.1) licensed by Digital

Content Protection, LLC.

Notes

Audio signal

types

Audio signal

formats

Compatible

HDMI

components

2ch Linear

PCM

2ch, 32-192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit

CD, DVD-Video,

DVD-Audio, etc.

Multi-ch

Linear PCM

5.1 ch, 32-96 kHz,

16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, etc.

Bitstream Dolby Digital,

DTS

DVD-Video, etc.

107

HDMI

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■Assigning HDMI components

You can assign an HDMI component to the HDMI IN 1 or

HDMI IN 2 jack on the rear panel of this unit so that the

audio and video signals input via HDMI connection can

be simultaneously played back.

Use the HDMI IN parameter in INPUT MENU to assign

HDMI components (see page 81).

■Converting analog video signals to

HDMI

This unit is equipped with the HDMI interlace/progressive

up-conversion feature where the analog video signals

input at the composite video, S-video and component

video jacks on the rear panel of this unit are digitally

processed and up-converted so that they can be output at

the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit with all-

digital resolution quality.

Use the HDMI I/P parameter in OPTION MENU to

convert analog component video signals to HDMI

(see page 84).

When the analog video signals with 1080i or 720p of resolution

are up-converted to HDMI and output at the HDMI OUT jack, the

picture quality may worsen.

■Setting the HDMI support audio

You can choose to play back HDMI audio signals on this

unit or on another HDMI component connected to the

HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit.

Use the HDMI SET parameter in SOUND MENU to set

the HDMI support audio (see page 80).

Perform the following steps to listen to playback from an

HDMI component.

If an error message appears in the front panel display,

see page 114 for a complete list of error messages and proper

remedies.

1Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or press one of the input selector buttons on

the remote control) to select the input source

assigned to the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack

on the rear panel of this unit.

2Press AUDIO SELECT on the front panel or

AUDIO SEL on the remote control repeatedly

to select AUTO or HDMI as the input mode.

The following front panel displays are examples

where DVD is selected as the input source.

3Start playback on the connected HDMI

component.

Setting the HDMI parameters

Note

Basic HDMI operations

Note

INPUT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

AXM

or

Front panel Remote control

(U.S.A. model)

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

A.SEL: AUTO

INPUT: DVD

V-AUX

A

SP

VOLUME

L R

dB

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

XM

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

A.SEL: HDMI

INPUT: DVD

AUDIO SEL

AUDIO SELECT

or

Front panel Remote control

TROUBLESHOOTING

108

Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below

or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, and contact the

nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.

■General

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy Refer to

page

This unit fails to turn

on when MAIN ZONE

ON/OFF on the front

panel (or POWER on

the remote control) is

pressed, or enters in

the standby mode

soon after the power

has been turned on.

The power cable is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

Connect the power cable firmly. —

The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers. 29

The protection circuitry has been

activated.

Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit

and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for

each connection does not touch anything other than

its respective connection.

13

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

and strong static electricity).

Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the

power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use

it normally.

—

No sound Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective. 18–26

The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone. —

The input mode is set to HDMI, COAX/

OPT or ANALOG.

Set the input mode to AUTO. 41

No appropriate input source has been

selected.

Select an appropriate input source with INPUT,

MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons on

the remote control.

34

Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 13

The front speakers to be used have not

been selected properly.

Select the front speakers by pressing

SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel (or by pressing

SPEAKERS A or B on the remote control).

34

The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. —

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to

cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 36

The input mode is set to ANALOG while

playing a source encoded with a DTS

signal.

Set the input mode to AUTO or COAX/OPT.

41

The signals this unit cannot reproduce (a

CD-ROM, for example) are being

received from a source component.

Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.

—

The HDMI components connected to this

unit do not support the HDCP copy

protection standards.

Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP

copy protection standards. —

SUPPORT AUDIO is set to OTHER and

HDMI audio signals are not being played

back on this unit.

Set SUPPORT AUDIO to HTR-5990 in MANUAL

SETUP. 80

No picture V CONV. is set to OFF. Set V CONV. to ON. 83

Video signals in the progressive format or

HDTV video signals are being input.

The signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or

HDMI IN 2 jack are being output at the

HDMI OUT jack.

109

TROUBLESHOOTING

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

Problem Cause Remedy Refer to

page

The sound suddenly

goes off.

The protection circuitry has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

Check that the impedance selector setting is correct. 29

Check the speaker wires are not touching each other

and then turn this unit back on. —

The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again. —

The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute. 36

Only the speaker on

one side can be

heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective. 18

Incorrect balance settings in the OSD

menu.

Adjust the SP LEVEL settings. 78

Only the center

speaker outputs

substantial sound.

When playing a monaural source with a

CINEMA DSP program, the source signal

is directed to the center channel, and the

front and surround speakers output effect

sounds.

No sound from the

effect speakers

The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn them on. 40

You are using a source or program

combination that does not output sound

from all channels.

Try another sound field program.

34

No sound from the

center speaker

The output level of the center speaker is

set to minimum.

Raise the level of the center speaker. 78

CENTER SP is set to NONE in

SPEAKER SET.

Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker. 76

One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for

7ch Stereo) has been selected.

Try another sound field program. 34

No sound from the

surround speakers

The output level of the surround speakers

is set to minimum.

Raise the output level of the surround speakers. 78

SUR. L/R SP is set to NONE in

SPEAKER SET.

Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and

right speakers. 76

A monaural or stereo source is being

played with STRAIGHT.

Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn on the sound

fields. —

No sound from the

surround back

speakers

Presence speakers are selected. Select SB in PRIORITY. 77

SUR. L/R SP is set to NONE in

SPEAKER SET.

If the surround left and right speakers are set to

NONE, surround back speakers are automatically set

to NONE. Select the appropriate setting for the

surround left and right speakers.

76

SB L/R SP is set to NONE in SPEAKER

SET.

Select SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1 or LRGx2. 77

No sound from the

subwoofer

LFE/BASS OUT is set to FRONT when a

Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being

played.

Select SWFR or BOTH.

76

LFE/BASS OUT is set to SWFR or Front

when a 2-channel source is being played.

Select BOTH. 76

The source does not contain low bass

signals.

110

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy Refer to

page

Dolby Digital or DTS

sources cannot be

played. (Dolby Digital

or DTS indicator in

the front panel

display does not light

up.)

The connected component is not set to

output Dolby Digital or DTS digital

signals.

Make an appropriate setting following the operations

instructions for your component. —

The input mode is set to ANALOG. Set the input mode to AUTO or COAX/OPT.

41

A humming sound

can be heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective. —

No connection from the turntable to the

GND terminal.

Connect the grounding cord of your turnable to the

GND terminal of this unit. 25

The volume level is

low while playing a

record.

The record is being played on a turntable

with an MC cartridge.

The turntable should be connected to this unit through

an MC-head amplifier. 25

The volume level

cannot be increased,

or the sound is

distorted.

The component connected to the OUT

(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.

Turn on the power to the component.

—

The sound effect

cannot be recorded.

It is not possible to record the sound effect

with a recording component.

A source cannot be

recorded by a digital

recording component

connected to this

DIGITAL OUTPUT

jack.

The source component is not connected to

this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks.

Connect the source component to the DIGITAL

INPUT jacks. 18–25

Some components cannot record the

Dolby Digital or DTS sources.

A source cannot be

recorded by an

analog component

connected to the

AUDIO OUT jacks.

The source component is not connected to

the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.

Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO

IN jacks.

18–25

The sound field

parameters and some

other settings on this

unit cannot be

changed.

MEMORY GUARD is set to ON. Select OFF.

84

This unit does not

operate properly.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity)

or by a power supply with low voltage.

Disconnect the AC power cable from the outlet and

then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. —

CHECK SP WIRES

appears in the front

panel display.

Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.

13

There is noise

interference from

digital or radio-

frequency equipment,

or this unit.

This unit is too close to the digital or

radio-frequency equipment.

Move this unit further away from such equipment.

—

The picture is

disturbed.

The video source uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent dubbing.

This unit suddenly

enters the standby

mode.

The internal temperature becomes too

high and the overheat protection circuitry

has been activated.

Wait for about 1 hour until this unit cools down and

then turn it back on. —

111

TROUBLESHOOTING

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■Tuner

■XM Satellite Radio

If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel

display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.

Problem Cause Remedy See

page

FM

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

The characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts may cause this problem

when the transmitter is too far away or

the antenna input is poor.

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

27

Use the manual tuning method. 45

There is distortion, and

clear reception cannot

be obtained even with a

good FM antenna.

There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multipath interference. —

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. 27

Use the manual tuning method. 45

Previously preset

stations can no longer

be tuned in.

This unit has been disconnected for a

long period.

Preset the stations again.

45

AM

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections

and orient it for the best reception. —

Use the manual tuning method. 45

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

Noises result from lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors,

thermostats and other electrical

equipment.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.

This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to

eliminate all noise. —

There are buzzing and

whining noises.

A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. —

Status message Cause Remedy See

page

CHECK ANTENNA

The XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna

accessory is not connected, or does not

work properly.

Check the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna

accessory connections. 50

UPDATING The XM user encryption code is being

updated. Wait until the encryption code is updated. —

NO SIGNAL The signal is too weak.

Check the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna

accessory connections and orient it for the best

reception.

50

LOADING It takes longer than four seconds for audio

or text data to be decoded. Wait until the decoding process has finished. —

OFF AIR

The XM Satellite Radio channel you

selected is not currently broadcasting any

signal.

Check the channel number again or select another

XM Satellite Radio channel. 53

<XM> - - - The channel Station ID (SID) is no longer

available.

- - - / - - - No artist name/feature or song/program

title is available.

<CAT> - - - No channels are available for the selected

category.

Select another channel category by pressing

CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote

control) repeatedly.

53

112

TROUBLESHOOTING

■Remote control

Problem Cause Remedy See

page

The remote control

does not work or

function properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum

range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-

axis from the front panel.

4

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

Reposition this unit.

—

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 4

AMP/SOURCE/TV is set incorrectly. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV correctly.

When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position.

When operating the component selected by the input

selector button, set it to the SOURCE position.

When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO

area, set it to the TV position.

—

The remote control code was not correctly

set.

Set the remote control code correctly using

“LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end

of this manual.

92

Try setting another code of the same manufacturer

using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at

the end of this manual.

92

The library code of the remote control and

the remote control ID of this unit do not

match.

Match the remote control ID of this unit with the

corresponding remote control library code. 89, 92

Even if the remote control code is

correctly set, there are some models that

do not respond to the remote control.

Program the necessary functions independently into

the programmable buttons using the Learn feature. 94

The remote control

does not learn new

functions.

The batteries of this remote control and/or

the other remote control are too weak.

Replace the batteries. 4

The distance between the two remote

controls is too much or too little.

Place the remote controls at the proper distance. 94

The signal coding or modulation of the

other remote control is not compatible

with this remote control.

Learning is not possible.

—

Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for

the new functions. 99

113

TROUBLESHOOTING

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■AUTO SETUP

Before AUTO SETUP

During AUTO SETUP

Error message Cause Remedy See

page

Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the

OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 30

Unplug HP! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones. —

Error message Cause Remedy See

page

E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not

detected.

Select the front speakers with SPEAKER A or B. —

Check the front L/R speaker connections. 13

E-2:NO SURR.SP A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections. 13

E-3:NO PRNS SP A presence channel signal is not detected. Check the presence speaker connections. 13

E-4:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal is

detected.

Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT

SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you

only have one surround back speaker.

13

E-5:NOISY Background noise is too loud.

Try running AUTO SETUP in a quiet environment. —

Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners

or move them away from the optimizer microphone. —

E-6:CHECK SUR.

Surround back speaker(s) is (are)

connected, though surround L/R speakers

are not.

Connect surround speakers when you use (a)

surround back speaker(s). 13

E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged

during the AUTO SETUP procedure.

Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to

OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 30

E-8:NO SIGNAL The optimizer microphone does not detect

test tones.

Check the microphone setting. 30

Check the speaker connections and placement. 13

E-9:USER CANCEL The AUTO SETUP procedure was

cancelled due to user activity. Run AUTO SETUP again. 30

E-10:INTERNAL

ERROR An internal error occurred. Run AUTO SETUP again. 30

114

TROUBLESHOOTING

After AUTO SETUP

• If the ERROR or WARNING screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then perform the AUTO SETUP procedure again.

• If warning W-1 appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal.

• If warning W-2 or W-3 appears, no corrections are made.

• If error E-10 occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center.

■HDMI

Warning message Cause Remedy See

page

W-1:OUT OF PHASE

Speaker polarity is not correct. This

message may appear depending on the

speakers even when the speakers are

connected correctly.

Check the speaker connections for proper polarity

(+ or –). 13

W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the

listening position is over 24 m (80 ft). Bring the speaker closer to the listening position. —

W-3:LEVEL ERROR

The difference of volume level among

speakers is excessive. (No level correction

is made.)

Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers

are set in locations with similar conditions. —

Check the speaker connections. 13

Use speakers of similar quality. —

Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. 31

Notes

Error message Cause Remedy See

page

DEVICE OVER More than 5 HDMI components including

this unit are connected.

Reduce the number of the connected HDMI

components. —

HDCP ERROR HDCP testing failed. Check that the connected HDMI components support

the HDCP copy protection standards. —

GLOSSARY

115

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ASA (Advanced Speaker Array)

ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes

the sound fed to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to

provide the optimal surround sound experience. When you

set up your home theater system using all eight speaker

outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround Right, Surround

Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and

Subwoofer) placing the two Surround Back speakers close

together facing the front of the room will provide the

largest sweet spot. If for practical reasons you have to

place the Surround Back speakers apart, you will need to

go THX Audio Set-up screen and choose the setting that

most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing, which

will re-optimized the surround sound-field.

ASA is used in three new modes: THX Select2 Cinema,

THX Music Mode and THX Games Mode.

■Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives

you completely independent multi-channel audio. It

provides 5 full-range audio channels; 3 front channels

(left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels.

An additional channel especially for bass effects, called

LFE (low frequency effect) is also provided giving the

system a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as a 0.1

channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround

speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and

surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby

Surround. The wide dynamic range (maximum to

minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range

channels and the precise sound orientation generated

using digital sound processing provide listeners with a

previously unheard of excitement and realism.

■Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output

channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done by using

a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the

2 in the original recording. For best results, Dolby Digital

EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with

Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel,

you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving

sound especially with scenes that have flyover and fly-

around effects.

■Dolby Pro Logic x

Dolby Pro Logic x is a new technology enabling 6.1 or

7.1 multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-

channel sources. There is a Music mode for music, a

Movie mode for movies and a Game mode for games.

■Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system

to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front

left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog

(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound

effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces

sound within a narrow frequency range.

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes

and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as

well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit

employs a digital signal processing system that

automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to

enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

■DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality

for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully

backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. 96 refers to

a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz

sampling rate). 24 refers to 24-bit word length.

DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original

96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with

full-quality full-motion video for music programs and

motion picture soundtracks on DVD-video.

■DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.

has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy

the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of

DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces

practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically,

left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus

an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-

channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that

enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding a surround

back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format.

■ITU-R

ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU

(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R

recommends a standard speaker placement which is used

in many critical listening rooms, such as mastering

studios.

■LFE 0.1 channel

This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.

The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a

low frequency range compared to the full-range

reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

GLOSSARY

Audio information

116

GLOSSARY

■Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes conventional 2-channel sources for

6 channel playback by. It enables playback with the full-

range channels with higher separation comparable to

digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available;

Music mode for playing music sources and Cinema mode

for movies.

■PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog

audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without

using any compression. This is used as a method of

recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a

technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for pulse code

modulation, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and

then modulated for recording.

■Sampling frequency and number of

quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of

times the signal is sampled per second is called the

sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when

converting the sound level into a numeric value is called

the number of quantized bits.

The range of rates that can be played back is determined

based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range

representing the sound level difference is determined by

the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the

sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies

that can be played back, and the higher the number of

quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be

reproduced.

■THX Cinema processing

THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies

established by the world-renowned film production

company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’

personal desire to make your experience of the film

soundtrack, in both movie theaters and in your home

theater, as faithful as possible to what the director

intended.

Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theaters

called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back

in movie theaters with similar equipment and conditions.

This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto

Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for

playback in a small home theater environment.

THX engineers developed patented technologies to

accurately translate the sound from the movie theater

environment into the home, correcting the tonal and

spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX

indicator is on, THX features are automatically added in

Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).

Adaptive decorrelation

In a movie theater, a large number of surround speakers

help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but

in a home theater there are usually only two speakers. This

can make the surround speakers sound like headphones

that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround

sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you

move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive

decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel's time

and phase relationship with respect to the other surround

channel. This expands the listening position and

creates – with only two speakers – the same spacious

surround experience as in a movie theater.

Re-equalization

The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively

bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment

in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be

played back in large movie theaters using very different

professional equipment. Re-equalization restores the

correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a

small home environment.

Timbre matching

The human ear changes our perception of sound

depending on the direction from which it is coming. In a

movie theater, there is an array of surround speakers so

that the surround information is all around you. In a home

theater, you use only two speakers located to the side of

your head. The timbre matching feature filters the

information going to the surround speakers so that they

more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound

coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless

panning between the front and surround speakers.

117

GLOSSARY

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal

is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the

PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be

reproduced more faithfully with this system because each

of these signals is independent. A monitor with

component input jacks is required in order to use the

component signal for output.

■Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, the video signal

is composed of three basic elements of a video picture;

color, luminance and synchronization data. A composite

video jack on a video component transmits these three

elements combined.

■S-video signal

With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted

as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the

chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the

S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss

and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful

images.

■CINEMA DSP

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were

originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed

for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room

size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can

differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in

the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured

data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original

sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic,

Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and

audio experience of a movie theater in the listening room

of your own home.

■SILENT CINEMA

YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones.

Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound

field so that accurate representations of all the sound field

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

■Virtual CINEMA DSP

YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP

algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field

surround effects without any surround speakers by using

virtual surround speakers.

It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a

minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center

speaker.

Video information Sound field program information

118

GLOSSARY

This unit employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic

Optimizer (YPAO) technology, together with the

Parametric EQ settings (see page 79), to optimize the

frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to

match your listening environment. YPAO uses a

combination of the following three parameters

(Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise

adjustment of the frequency characteristics.

■Frequency

This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave

increments between 63 Hz and 16 kHz.

■Gain

This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB

between –20 and +6 dB.

■Q factor

The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as

the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the

values 0.5 and 10.

YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your

listening requirements using a combination of the above

three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each

equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit

has 7 equalizer bands for each channel.

The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise

adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2).

This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as

in Figure 1).

Figure 1

Figure 2

Parametric equalizer information

Gain

Frequency

Original frequency

characteristic

Band 1

Frequency

characteristic after

correction

Gain

Frequency

Band 1

Band 2

Frequency

characteristic after

correction

Original frequency

characteristic

SPECIFICATIONS

119

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,

Surround back

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω..................................... 120 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 155/195/250/330 W

• Dynamic Headroom

8 Ω...................................................................................... 1.03 dB

• Damping Factor (IHF)

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω................................................... 140 or more

• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance

PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ

CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ

MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ

• Maximum Input Signal

PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) .............................. 100 mV or more

CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.4 V or more

• Output Level/Output Impedance

OUT (REC) .......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ

PRE OUT ................................................................... 1.0 V/500 Ω

SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 2.0 V/500 Ω

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUT ............................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance

CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 150 mV/100 Ω

• Frequency Response

CD to Front L/R ............................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB

• RIAA Equalization Deviation

PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

PHONO to OUT (REC)

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ......................................... 0.02% or less

CD, etc. to Front L/R

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 60 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R ................................. 86 dB or more

CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R ............................ 100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more

CD, etc.

(5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/45 dB or more

• Tone Control Characteristics (Front L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ....................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz

BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................. 350 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz

TREBLE Turnover Frequency............................................ 3.5 kHz

• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back) ........... 12 dB/oct.

L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ......................................................... 24 dB/oct.

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Signal Type (Gray Back) ............................................. NTSC

• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) .......................... NTSC/PAL

• Signal Level

Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)

Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)

• Maximum Input Level (V CONV. off) ................. 1.5 Vp-p or more

• Signal to Noise Ratio (V CONV. off) ....................... 60 dB or more

• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Component (V CONV. off) ................... 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range ..................................................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

• Usable Sensitivity (IHF)........................................ 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)

• Selectivity ................................................................................ 70 dB

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz)

Stereo .....................................................................................42 dB

• Frequency Response

Stereo .............................................. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB

• Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range ........................................................ 530 to 1710 kHz

• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m

GENERAL

• Power Supply ........................................................ AC 120 V, 60 Hz

• Power Consumption ................................................. 500 W/630 VA

• Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.1 W or less

• AC Outlets ................................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum)

• Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................. 435 x 171 x 424 mm

(17.1 x 6.7 x 16.7 in)

• Weight .................................................................. 16.8 kg (37.0 lbs)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

SPECIFICATIONS

i

LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES

CABLE

ABC 0030, 0035

AMERICAST 0926

BELL SOUTH 0926

BIRMINGHAM CABLE

COMMUNICATIONS

0303

BRITISH TELECOM 0030

CABLE & WIRELESS

1095

DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904,

1904

DIRECTOR 0503

FILMNET 0470

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

0030, 0303, 0503,

0837,

GOLDSTAR 0171

HAMLIN 0036, 0300

JERROLD 0030, 0303, 0503,

0837

LG 0171

MNET 0470

MEMOREX 0027

MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837,

1133

NTL 1095

NOOS 0844

ONO 1095

PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX

0030

PACE 0264, 1087, 1095

PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134

PARAGON 0027

PHILIPS 0332, 0344

PIONEER 0171, 0560, 0904,

1904

PULSAR 0027

QUASAR 0027

REGAL 0300, 0306

RUNCO 0027

SAGEM 0844

SAMSUNG 0027, 0171

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

0035, 0504, 0904,

1904

SONY 1033

STARCOM 0030

SUPERCABLE 0303

TS 0030

TELE+1 0470

TELEWEST 1095

TORX 0030

TOSHIBA 0027

TRANS PX 0303

UNITED CABLE 0030

ZENITH 0027, 0552, 0926

CD PLAYER

AIWA 0184

ARCAM 0184

AUDIO RESEARCH 0184

AUDIO TON 0184

AUDIOLAB 0184

AUDIOMECA 0184

CAIRN 0184

CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS

0056

CARVER 0184, 0206

CYRUS 0184

DKK 0027

DMX ELECTRONICS

0184

DENON 0900

DYNAMIC BASS 0206

EMERSON 0332

FISHER 0206

GENEXXA 0059, 0332

GOODMANS 0332

GRUNDIG 0184

HARMAN/KARDON

0184, 0200

HITACHI 0059

JVC 0099

KENWOOD 0055, 0064

KRELL 0184

LXI 0332

LINN 0184

MCS 0056

MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332

MARANTZ 0056, 0184

MATSUI 0184

MEMOREX 0332

MERIDIAN 0184

MICROMEGA 0184

MIRO 0027

MISSION 0184

MYRYAD 0184

NAD 0027

NSM 0184

NAIM 0184

OPTIMUS 0027, 0059, 0064,

0206, 0332

PANASONIC 0056

PHILIPS 0184

PIONEER 0059, 0332

POLK AUDIO 0184

PROTON 0184

QED 0184

QUAD 0184

QUASAR 0056

RCA 0059, 0206, 0332

REALISTIC 0206

REVOX 0184

ROTEL 0184

SAE 0184

SANSUI 0184, 0332

SANYO 0206

SCOTT 0332

SEARS 0332

SHARP 0064

SIMAUDIO 0184

SONIC FRONTIERS 0184

SONY 0027

SYMPHONIC 0332

TAG MCLAREN 0184

TANDY 0059

TECHNICS 0056

THORENS 0184

THULE 0184

UNIVERSUM 0184

VICTOR 0099

WARDS 0184

YAMAHA 2300, 2301

CD RECORDER

KENWOOD 0653

MARANTZ 0653

PHILIPS 0653

YAMAHA 2400

DVD PLAYER

ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS

0757

ALBA 0744

AMSTRAD 0740

APEX DIGITAL 0699, 0744,

0782, 0821, 0823,

0857, 1127

BLAUPINKT 0744

BLUE PARADE 0598

BUSH 0740

CENTREX 0699

CLATRONIC 0815

CYBERHOME 0741

DVD2000 0548

DAEWOO 0811, 0797

DANSAI 0797

DECCA 0797

DENON 0517

DIAMOND 0795

DIGITREX 0699

EMERSON 0618

ENTERPRISE 0618

FISHER 0697

GE 0549, 0744

GO VIDEO 0742

GOLDSTAR 0768

GRADIENTE 0678

GREENHILL 0744

GRUNDIG 0566

HITACHI 0600, 0691

HITEKER 0699

JVC 0585, 0650

KLH 0744

KENWOOD 0517, 0561

KOSS 0678

LG 0768

LIMIT 0795

MAGNAVOX 0530, 0702

MARANTZ 0566

MEMOREX 0858

MICO 0750

MICROSOFT 0549

MINTEK 0744

MITSUBISHI 0548

MUSTEK 0757

NESA 0744

ONKYO 0530

ORITRON 0678

PALSONIC 0699

PANASONIC 0517, 0659, 1389

PHILIPS 0530, 0566, 0673,

0881

PIONEER 0552, 0598, 0658,

0659

POLK AUDIO 0566

PROSCAN 0549

QWESTAR 0678

RCA 0549, 0598, 0744

ROTEL 0650

SM ELECTRONIC 0757

SAMSUNG 0600

SANYO 0697

SHARP 0657

SHERWOOD 0797

SHINSONIC 0560

SLIM ART 0811

SONY 0560, 0891

SYLVANIA 0702

TATUNG 0797

TEAC 0598, 0744

TECHNICS 0517

THETA DIGITAL 0598

THOMSON 0549

TOSHIBA 0530

URBAN CONCEPTS 0530

XBOX 0549

YAMAHA 0517, 0566, 0572,

2100, 2101, 2102

ZENITH 0530, 0618, 0768

ZEUS 0811

DVD RECORDER

PANASONIC 2800, 2801, 2802

PHILIPS 2808

PIONEER 2804, 2805, 2806

SHARP 2812, 2813

SONY 2809, 2810, 2811

TOSHIBA 2803

VICTOR 2814

YAMAHA 2807

LD PLAYER

CARVER 0091

DENON 0086

MARANTZ 0091

MITSUBISHI 0086

NAD 0086

NAGSMI 0086

OPTIMUS 0086

PHILIPS 0091

PIONEER 0086

SALORA 0091

SONY 0228

TELEFUNKEN 0086

YAMAHA 2200

MD RECORDER

KENWOOD 0708

ONKYO 0895

SHARP 0888

SONY 0517

YAMAHA 2500, 2501, 2502

RECEIVER (TUNER)

ADC 0558

AIWA 0185, 1116, 1415,

1432, 1668

ALCO 1417

ANAM 1636

APEX DIGITAL 1284

AUDIOLAB 1216

AUDIOTRONIC 1216

AUDIOVOX 1417

BOSE 1256

CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS

1397

ii

CAPETRONIC 0558

CARVER 1116, 1216

CENTREX 1284

DENON 1387

FERGUSON 0558

FINE ARTS 1216

GRUNDIG 1216

HARMAN/KARDON

0137, 1331

INTEGRA 0162, 1325

JBL 0137, 1333

JVC 0101, 0558, 1401,

1522

KLH 1417, 1439

KENWOOD 1054, 1340

MCS 0066

MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216,

1296,

MARANTZ 0066, 1116, 1216,

1316

MICROMEGA 1216

MUSICMAGIC 1116

MYRYAD 1216

NAD 0347

NORCENT 1416

ONKYO 0162, 0869, 1325

OPTIMUS 0558, 1050

PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545,

1790

PHILIPS 1116, 1216, 1293,

1295, 1296, 1310,

1316

PIONEER 0041, 0558, 1050,

1411

POLK AUDIO 1316

PROSCAN 1281

QUASAR 0066

RCA 0558, 1050, 1281,

1417, 1636,

SABA 0558

SANSUI 1116

SCHNEIDER 0558

SONY 0185, 1085, 1185,

1685, 1785

STEREOPHONICS 1050

SUNFIRE 1340

TEAC 1417

TECHNICS 0066, 1335, 1336,

1545

TELEFUNKEN 0558

THOMSON 1281

THORENS 1216

UHER 0558

VENTURER 1417

VICTOR 0101

WARDS 0041, 0185

YAMAHA 0203, 1203, 1358,

2600, 2601, 2602,

2603, 2604, 2605

SATELLITE TUNER

@SAT 1327

ABSAT 0150

ALBA 0482

ALPHASTAR 0799

AMSTRAD 0874

ASTON 0169, 1156

ASTRO 0200

ATSAT 1327

AVALON 0423

BLAUPUNKT 0200

BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING

0874, 1202

CANAL DIGITAL 0880

CANAL SATELLITE 0880

CANAL+ 0880

CHAPARRAL 0243

CITYCOM 1203

CONNEXIONS 0423

CROSSDIGITAL 1136

CYRUS 0227

D-BOX 0750, 1154

DMT 1102

DNT 0227, 0423

DAERYUNG 0423

DAEWOO 1323

DIGENIUS 0326

DIRECTV 0274, 0419, 0593,

0666, 0751, 0776,

0846, 1103, 1136,

1169, 1776, 1883

DISH NETWORK SYSTEM

0802, 1032

DISHPRO 0802, 1032

DISTRATEL 0111

DREAM MULTIMEDIA

1264

ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637,

0802, 0880, 0898,

1032, 1113

ENGEL 1044

EXPRESSVU 0802

FTE 0890

FINLUX 0482

FRACARRO 0898

FUBA 0423

GE 0593

GOI 0802

GALAXIS 0890, 1138

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

0896

GOLD BOX 0880

GRUNDIG 0200, 0874

HTS 0802

HIRSCHMANN 0200, 0423

HITACHI 0482, 0846

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM

0776, 1169, 1776

HUMAX 0890, 1203

INVIDEO 0898

JVC 0802

KATHREIN 0150, 0200, 0227,

0276, 0685, 1248

KREISELMEYER 0200

LABGEAR 1323

LOGIX 1044

LORENZEN 0326

MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751

MANHATTAN 0482, 1044,

1110

MARANTZ 0227

MEDIASAT 0880

MEMOREX 0751

METRONIC 0111

MITSUBISHI 0776

MOTOROLA 0896

MYRYAD 0227

NEXT LEVEL 0896

NOKIA 0482, 0750, 0778,

1154, 1250, 1750

OCTALTV 1032

ORBITECH 1127

PACE 0482, 0874, 1202,

1350

PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874,

1347

PANDA 0482

PAYSAT 0751

PHILIPS 0160, 0227, 0482,

0749, 0751, 0776,

0880, 1103, 1169,

1776

PIONEER 0880

PROMAX 0482

PROSCAN 0419, 0593

RCA 0170, 0419, 0593,

0882

RFT 0227

RADIOSHACK 0896

RADIOLA 0227

RADIX 0423

SKY 0874, 0883, 1202

SM ELECTRONIC 1227

SABRE 0482

SAGEM 0847, 1141, 1280

SAMSUNG 1044, 1136, 1303,

1319

SAT CONTROL 1327

SATSTATION 1110

SCHWAIGER 1138

SEEMANN 0423

SIEMENS 0200

SONY 0666, 0874, 1666

STAR CHOICE 0896

STRONG 1327

TPS 0847, 1280

TANTEC 0482

TECHNISAT 1126, 1127

TELESTAR 1127

THOMSON 0482, 0880, 1073,

1318

TOPFIELD 1233

TOSHIBA 0776, 0817, 1776

ULTIMATETV 0419, 0666

UNIDEN 0749, 0751

UNIVERSUM 0200

VENTANA 0227

WISI 0200, 0423, 0482

XSAT 0150

ZEHNDER 1102

ZENITH 0883, 1883

TAPE DECK

AIWA 0056

CARVER 0056

GRUNDIG 0056

HARMAN/KARDON

0056

MAGNAVOX 0056

MARANTZ 0056

MYRYAD 0056

OPTIMUS 0054

PHILIPS 0056

PIONEER 0054

POLK AUDIO 0056

RCA 0054

REVOX 0056

SANSUI 0056

SONY 0270

THORENS 0056

WARDS 0054

YAMAHA 2700,2701

TV

AGB 0543

AOC 0036, 0057, 0087,

0119, 0120, 0135,

0205, 0207, 0478

ASA 0131

AWA 0036

ACURA 0036

ADDISON 0119, 0135, 0680

ADMIRAL 0120, 0190, 0490

ADVENT 0788

AIKO 0119

AKAI 0036, 0057, 0235,

0388, 0543, 0729,

0839

AKURA 0291

ALBA 0036, 0064, 0398,

0695

AMERICA ACTION 0207

AMPRO 0778

AMSTRAD 0036, 0064, 0198,

0398, 0439, 0460,

0543

ANAM 0036, 0207, 0277

ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677

ANITECH 0036

APEX DIGITAL 0775, 0792,

0794

AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136

BANG & OLUFSEN 0592

BASIC 0036

BAUR 0064, 0388, 0539

BAYSONIC 0207

BEAUMARK 0205

BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741,

0742

BELL & HOWELL 0181

BEON 0064

BLAUPUNKT 0222

BLUE SKY 0695, 1064

BONDSTEC 0274

BRADFORD 0207

BRANDT 0136, 0362

BROKSONIC 0263, 0490

BUSH 0036, 0064, 0398,

0401, 0695, 1064

CCE 0064

CGE 0274

CTC 0274

CXC 0207

CANDLE 0057

CARNIVALE 0057

CARVER 0081, 0197

CASCADE 0036

CATHAY 0064

CELEBRITY 0027

CELERA 0792

CENTURION 0064

CHANGHONG 0792

CHING TAI 0036, 0119

CHUN YUN 0027, 0036, 0119,

0207

CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207

CIMLINE 0036

CINERAL 0119, 0478

CITIZEN 0057, 0087, 0119

CLARION 0207

CLARIVOX 0064

CLATRONIC 0274, 0397

CONDOR 0347, 0397

CONRAC 0835

iii

CONTEC 0036, 0207

CRAIG 0207

CROSLEY 0081

CROWN 0036, 0064, 0207,

0397, 0445

CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0074,

0081, 0087, 0120,

0172, 0181, 0193,

0478, 0729, 1174,

1374

DAEWOO 0036, 0057, 0064,

0119, 0135, 0181,

0197, 0205, 0207,

0401, 0478, 0650,

0661, 1688

DANSAI 0064

DAYTON 0036

DE GRAAF 0235, 0575

DECCA 0064, 0543

DENON 0172

DIGATRON 0064

DIXI 0036, 0064

DUMONT 0044

DWIN 0747, 0801

ECE 0064

ELBE 0286

ELECTROBAND 0027

ELIN 0064, 0575

ELITE 0347

ELTA 0036

EMERSON 0181, 0205, 0207,

0263, 0388, 0490,

0650

ENVISION 0057,0840

EPSON 0860

ERRES 0064

ETHER 0036, 0057

ETRON 0036

EUROPHON 0543

FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136,

0265, 0314, 0362,

0587

FIDELITY 0388

FINLANDIA 0235, 0373

FINLUX 0064, 0131, 0132,

0373, 0543

FIRSTAR 0036, 0263

FIRSTLINE 0036, 0274, 0695

FISHER 0131, 0181, 0235,

0397

FLINT 0482

FORMENTI 0064, 0347

FORTRESS 0120

FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291

FUJITSU 0710, 0836

FUNAI 0207, 0198, 0291

FUTURETECH 0207

GE 0057, 0074, 0078,

0119, 0205, 0207,

0478, 0587, 1174,

1374, 1481

GEC 0064, 0543

GATEWAY 1782, 1783

GELOSO 0036

GENEXXA 0190

GIBRALTER 0044, 0057

GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136,

0181, 0205, 0404

GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401,

0661

GOREMJE 0397

GRADIENTE 0080, 0197

GRAETZ 0190, 0388

GRANADA 0064, 0235, 0366,

0543

GRANDIN 0637

GRUNDIG 0064, 0222, 0514,

0583, 0614

GRUNPY 0207

HCM 0036, 0439

HALLMARK 0205

HANKOOK 0057, 0205, 0207

HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388,

0455, 0583

HANTAREX 0543

HARMAN/KARDON 0081

HARVARD 0207

HAVERMY 0120

HELLO KITTY 0478

HINARI 0036, 0064

HISAWA 0482

HITACHI 0036, 0057, 0119,

0132, 0136, 0172,

0190, 0205, 0252,

0383, 0508, 0575,

0605, 1172, 1283

HUA TUN 0036

HUANYU 0401

HYPSON 0064, 0291

ICE 0291, 0398

ITS 0398

ITT 0190, 0388, 0575

IMPERIAL 0274, 0397, 0445

INDIANA 0064

INFINITY 0081

INGELEN 0190

INNO HIT 0543

INNOVA 0064

INTEQ 0044

INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274,

0388, 0539

INTERVISION 0064, 0291,

0404

JBL 0081

JCB 0027

JVC 0080, 0398, 0490,

0680, 0710

JEAN 0036, 0078, 0119,

0183, 0263

JENSEN 0788

KEC 0207

KTV 0057, 0207

KAISUI 0036

KAPSCH 0190

KARCHER 0637

KATHREIN 0583

KENDO 0064

KENWOOD 0057

KNEISSEL 0286, 0462

KOLIN 0080, 0135, 0207

KORPEL 0064

KOYODA 0036

L&S ELECTRONIC 0835

LG 0057, 0064, 0087,

0135, 0205, 0741

LXI 0074, 0081, 0181,

0183, 0205

LEYCO 0064, 0291

LIESENK & TTER 0064

LOEWE 0539

LUXOR 0383, 0388

M ELECTRONIC 0036, 0064,

0131, 0132, 0136,

0190, 0314, 0373,

0401, 0507

MGA 0057, 0177, 0205

MTC 0057, 0087, 0539

MAGNADYNE 0274, 0543

MAGNAFON 0543

MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281,

1481

MANESTH 0291, 0347

MARANTZ 0057, 0064, 0081,

0583

MARK 0064

MATSUI 0036, 0064, 0235,

0398, 0514, 0543

MATSUSHITA 0277, 0677

MEDIATOR 0064

MEDION 0695, 0835, 1064

MEGATRON 0172, 0205

MEMOREX 0036, 0177, 0181,

0205, 0277, 0490,

1064

METZ 0474

MICROMAXX 0835

MICROSTAR 0835

MIDLAND 0044, 0074, 0078

MINERVA 0514

MINOKA 0439

MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135,

0177, 0181, 0205,

0207, 0263, 0277,

0539, 0863, 1277

MIVAR 0318,0319, 0543,

0636

MOTOROLA 0120

MULTITECH 0036, 0207

MYRYAD 0583

NAD 0183, 0205, 0388,

0893

NEC 0036, 0057, 0078,

0181, 0183, 0197,

0205, 0482, 0524,

1731

NEI 0064

NTC 0119

NECKERMANN 0064, 0583

NETSAT 0064

NEWAVE 0036, 0119, 0120,

0205

NIKKAI 0064, 0291

NIKKO 0057, 0119, 0205

NOKIA 0388, 0500, 0507,

0575, 0658

NORCENT 0775, 0851

NORDMENDE 0136, 0314,

0587

OCEANIC 0190, 0388

ONWA 0207, 0460

OPTIMUS 0181, 0193, 0277,

0677

OPTONICA 0120

ORION 0064, 0263, 0347,

0490, 0543

OSAKI 0291, 0439

OTTO VERSAND 0064, 0347,

0539, 0583

PALLADIUM 0397, 0445

PANAMA 0291

PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081,

0190, 0277, 0677,

1437

PATHE CINEMA 0265, 0347

PAUSA 0036

PENNEY 0057, 0074, 0078,

0087, 0183, 0205,

1374

PERDIO 0347

PHILCO 0057, 0064, 0081,

0172, 0205, 0207,

0274, 0490, 1688

PHILIPS 0027, 0057, 0064,

0078, 0081, 0119,

0135, 0205, 0401,

0583, 0717, 1481

PHONOLA 0064

PILOT 0057

PIONEER 0136, 0190, 0193,

0314, 0706, 0787,

0893

PORTLAND 0119

PRANDONI-PRINCE

0543

PRIMA 0788

PRISM 0078

PROFEX 0036, 0388

PROSCAN 0074

PROTECH 0036, 0064, 0274,

0291, 0445, 0695

PROTON 0036, 0057, 0205

PULSAR 0044

QUASAR 0078, 0277, 0677

QUELLE 0064, 0131, 0388,

0539

R-LINE 0064

RCA 0027, 0057, 0074,

0117, 0119, 0205,

0706, 1074, 1174,

1274, 1374, 1474,

1481, 1574

RFT 0455

RADIOSHACK 0057, 0074,

0181, 0205, 0207

RADIOLA 0064

RADIOMARELLI 0543

REALISTIC 0057, 0181, 0205,

0207

REDIFFUSION 0388

REOC 0741

REVOX 0064

REX 0190, 0286, 0291

ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445

RUNCO 0044, 0057, 0524,

0630

SBR 0064

SEG 0291, 0695

SEI 0543

SKY 0064

SSS 0207

SABA 0136, 0190, 0314,

0362

SACCS 0265

SAGEM 0637

SAISHO 0036, 0291, 0543

SALORA 0190, 0380, 0388,

0575

SAMBERS 0543

SAMPO 0036, 0057, 0119,

0120, 0181, 0198,

0205, 0677, 1782

SAMSUNG 0036, 0057, 0064,

0087, 0117, 0119,

0181, 0205, 0291,

0397, 0583, 0614,

0645, 0729, 0793,

0839, 0841

SANSEI 0478

SANSUI 0490

SANYO 0131, 0181, 0207,

0235, 0366, 0826

SCHAUB LORENZ 0388

SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398,

0695

SCOTCH 0205

SCOTT 0205, 0207, 0263

iv

SEARS 0074, 0081, 0181,

0183, 0198, 0205

SELECO 0190, 0286

SEMIVOX 0207

SEMP 0183

SHARP 0057, 0120, 0677

SHEN YING 0036, 0119

SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263

SIAREM 0543

SIEMENS 0064, 0222

SINUDYNE 0543

SKANTIC 0383

SKYGIANT 0207

SKYWORTH 0064

SOLAVOX 0190

SONITRON 0235

SONOKO 0036, 0064

SONOLOR 0190, 0235

SONTEC 0064

SONY 0027, 0677, 0861,

1127, 1532, 1678

SOUNDESIGN 0205, 0207

SOUNDWAVE 0064, 0445

SOWA 0078, 0087, 0119,

0183, 0205

SQUAREVIEW 0198

STANDARD 0036

STARLITE 0207

STERN 0190, 0286

SUPREME 0027

SYLVANIA 0057, 0081, 0198

SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207

SYNCO 0027, 0087, 0119,

0120, 0205, 0478

SYSLINE 0064

T + A 0474

TCM 0835

TMK 0205

TNCI 0044

TVS 0490

TACICO 0036, 0119, 0205

TAI YI 0036

TANDY 0120, 0190

TASHIKO 0119, 0677

TATUNG 0036, 0064, 0078,

0081, 0087, 0181,

0183, 0543

TEAC 0036, 0064, 0291,

0439, 0445, 0482,

0695, 1064

TEC 0274

TECHNEMA 0347

TECHNICS 0078, 0277, 0677

TECHWOOD 0078

TECO 0036, 0078, 0119,

0120, 0205, 0291,

0680

TEKNIKA 0081, 0087, 0119,

0177, 0207

TELEFUNKEN 0136, 0289,

0362, 0652, 0729

TELEMEISTER 0347

TELETECH 0036

TENSAI 0347

TERA 0057

THOMSON 0136, 0314, 0587,

0652, 1474

THORN 0064, 0131, 0388,

0539

TOSHIBA 0087, 0181, 0183,

0535, 0645, 0677,

0859, 1283, 1383,

1683, 1731

TRIUMPH 0543

TUNTEX 0036, 0057, 0119

UHER 0347

UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132,

0291, 0373, 0397,

0519

VECTOR RESEARCH

0057

VESTEL 0064

VICTOR 0080, 0277, 0677,

0680

VIDEOSAT 0274

VIDIKRON 0081

VIDTECH 0205

VIEWSONIC 1782

VISION 0347

VOXSON 0190

WALTHAM 0383

WARDS 0057, 0081, 0205,

0893

WATSON 0064, 0347

WAYCON 0183

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0064, 0347, 0490,

0650

YAMAHA 0057, 0677, 0796,

0860,

2900 (projector),

2901 (projector),

2902, 2903

YAPSHE 0277

YOKO 0064, 0291

ZENITH 0044, 0119, 0205,

0490

VCR

ASA 0064, 0108

ADMIRAL 0075

ADVENTURA 0027

AIKO 0305

AIWA 0027, 0064, 0334,

0375, 0379

AKAI 0068, 0342

AKIBA 0099

ALBA 0099, 0305, 0342,

0379

AMERICA ACTION 0305

AMERICAN HIGH 0062

AMSTRAD 0027

ANAM 0064, 0253, 0267,

0305, 0507

ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589

ANITECH 0099

ASHA 0267

ASUKA 0064

AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305

BAIRD 0027, 0068, 0131

BASIC LINE 0099, 0305

BEAUMARK 0267

BELL & HOWELL 0131

BLAUPUNKT 0253

BRANDT 0347

BRANDT ELECTRONIC

0068

BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506

BUSH 0099, 0305, 0379

CCE 0099, 0305

CGE 0027

CALIX 0064

CANON 0062

CARVER 0108

CIMLINE 0099

CINERAL 0305

CITIZEN 0064, 0305, 1305

COLT 0099

COMBITECH 0379

CRAIG 0064, 0074, 0099,

0267

CROWN 0099, 0305

CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068,

0087, 1062

CYBERNEX 0267

CYRUS 0108

DAEWOO 0072, 0131, 0305,

0669, 1305

DANSAI 0099

DE GRAAF 0069

DECCA 0027, 0108

DENON 0069

DUAL 0068

DUMONT 0027, 0108, 0131

DYNATECH 0027

ESC 0267, 0305

ELCATECH 0099

ELECTROHOME 0064

ELECTROPHONIC 0064

EMEREX 0059

EMERSON 0027, 0062, 0064,

0070, 0072, 0211,

0267, 0305, 1305,

1506

FERGUSON 0068, 0347

FIDELITY 0027

FINLANDIA 0108, 0131

FINLUX 0027, 0069, 0108,

0131

FIRSTLINE 0064, 0070, 0072,

0099

FISHER 0074, 0131

FUJI 0060, 0062

FUJITSU 0027, 0072

FUNAI 0027

GE 0062, 0087, 0267,

0834, 1062, 1087

GEC 0108

GARRARD 0027

GENERAL 0072

GO VIDEO 0459

GOLDHAND 0099

GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507,

1264

GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099,

0305

GRADIENTE 0027

GRAETZ 0068, 0131, 0267

GRANADA 0108, 0131

GRANDIN 0027, 0064, 0099

GRUNDIG 0099, 0108, 0253,

0374

HCM 0099

HI-Q 0074

HANSEATIC 0064

HARLEY DAVIDSON

0027

HARMAN/KARDON 0108

HARWOOD 0099

HINARI 0099, 0267, 0379

HITACHI 0027, 0064, 0068,

0069, 0267

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS

0069

HYPSON 0099

ITT 0068, 0131, 0267

ITV 0064, 0305

IMPERIAL 0027

INTERFUNK 0108

JVC 0068, 0072, 0094

JENSEN 0068

KEC 0064, 0305

KLH 0099

KAISUI 0099

KENWOOD 0068, 0094

KODAK 0062, 0064

KOLIN 0068, 0070

KORPEL 0099

LG 0064, 0069, 0072,

0507

LXI 0064

LENCO 0305

LEYCO 0099

LLOYD’S 0027

LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589

LOGIK 0099, 0267

LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131

M ELECTRONIC 0027

MEI 0062

MGA 0070, 0267

MGN TECHNOLOGY

0267

MTC 0027, 0267

MAGNASONIC 1305

MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066,

0108, 1808

MAGNIN 0267

MANESTH 0072, 0099

MARANTZ 0062, 0108

MARTA 0064

MATSUI 0375, 0379

MATSUSHITA 0062

MEDION 0375

MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064,

0066, 0074, 0075,

0131, 0267, 0334,

0375, 1264

MEMPHIS 0099

METZ 0064, 0374, 1589

MINOLTA 0069

MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094,

0108, 0834

MOTOROLA 0062, 0075

MULTITECH 0027, 0099

MURPHY 0027

MYRYAD 0108

NAD 0131

NEC 0062, 0064, 0068,

0075, 0094, 0131

NATIONAL 0253

NECKERMANN 0108

NESCO 0099

NEWAVE 0064

NIKKO 0064

NOBLEX 0267

NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267

NORDMENDE 0068, 0347

OCEANIC 0027, 0068

OKANO 0342, 0375

OLYMPUS 0062, 0253

OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131,

0459

ORION 0211, 0375, 0379,

1506

OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099

OTTO VERSAND 0108

PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099

PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253,

0643, 1062, 1589

PATHE MARCONI 0068

PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069,

0267, 1062, 1264

PENTAX 0069

PERDIO 0027

PHILCO 0062

PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645,

1108, 1208

PHONOLA 0108

PILOT 0064

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

©

2005 All rights reserved.

HTR-5990

Printed in Malaysia WF99950

HTR-5990

AV Receiver

OWNER’S MANUAL

U

PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108

POLK AUDIO 0108

PROFITRONIC 0267

PROLINE 0027

PROSCAN 0087, 1087

PROTEC 0099

PULSAR 0066

PYE 0108

QUASAR 0062, 1062

QUELLE 0108

RCA 0062, 0069, 0087,

0267, 0834, 1062,

1087

RADIOSHACK 0027

RADIOLA 0108

RADIX 0064

RANDEX 0064

REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064,

0074, 0075, 0131

REOC 0375

REPLAYTV 0641, 0643

REX 0068

ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267,

0305

RUNCO 0066

SBR 0108

SEG 0267

SEI 0108

STS 0069

SABA 0068, 0347

SALORA 0070

SAMPO 0064, 0075

SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459

SANKY 0066, 0075

SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094,

1506

SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267

SAVILLE 0379

SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,

0131

SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108

SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211

SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064,

0069, 0074, 0131,

1264

SELECO 0068

SEMP 0072

SHARP 0075, 0834

SHINTOM 0099, 0131

SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131

SILVA 0064

SINGER 0072, 0099

SINUDYNE 0108

SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643

SONTEC 0064

SONY 0027, 0059, 0060,

0062, 0663, 1259

SUNKAI 0375

SUNSTAR 0027

SUNTRONIC 0027

SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108,

0070, 1808

SYMPHONIC 0027

TMK 0267

TANDY 0027, 0131

TASHIKO 0027, 0064

TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072,

0094, 0108

TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305,

0334, 0669

TECHNICS 0062, 0253

TECO 0062, 0064, 0068,

0075

TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064

TELEAVIA 0068

TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347

TENOSAL 0099

TENSAI 0027

THOMAS 0027

THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094,

0347

THORN 0068, 0131

TIVO 0645, 0663

TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072,

0094, 0108, 0872

TOTEVISION 0064, 0267

UHER 0267

UNITECH 0267

UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,

0267

VECTOR 0072

VICTOR 0068, 0094

VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072

VIDEOMAGIC 0064

VIDEOSONIC 0267

VILLAIN 0027

WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069,

0074, 0075, 0087,

0099, 0108, 0267

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0099

XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099

YAMAHA 0068

YAMISHI 0099

YOKAN 0099

YOKO 0267

ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066,

1506

HTR-5990_U-cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, August 2, 2005 11:14 AM